OWNER’S MANUAL
OWNER’S MANUAL
Before using the PSR-A1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4.
PSR-A1000
2
(bottom)
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of
the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your pur-
chase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
3
PSR-A1000
(3)-7
1/2
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
•
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
•
Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recom-
mended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in
damage to the instrument or overheating.
•
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
•
Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as
heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise
damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a posi-
tion where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
•
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-
nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no
user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
•
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in
damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-
uids which might spill into any openings.
•
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
•
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
•
If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if
there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if
any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,
immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor
plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali-
fied Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
•
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
always hold the plug itself and not the cord.
•
Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or
during electrical storms.
•
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul-
tiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
•
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or
extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or
in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfigu-
ration or damage to the internal components.
•
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo
equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,
the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
•
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it
might accidentally fall over.
•
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and
other cables.
•
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching
the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could
cause damage to the internal components or result in the instru-
ment falling over.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor Location
Introduction
PSR-A1000
4
(3)-7
2/2
•
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-
nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the
power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-
mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
•
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated
wiping cloths.
•
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
•
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the
gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out-
let. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha ser-
vice personnel.
•
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,
since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
•
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-
ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or
connectors.
•
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high
or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, consult a physician.
Saving and backing up your data
•
Current memory data (see page 36) is lost when you turn off the
power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User
Drive (see page 36).
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera-
tion. Save important data to a floppy disk.
Backing up the floppy disk
•
To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-
mend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
When you change settings in a display page and then exit
from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter
Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically
stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the
power without properly exiting from the relevant display.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
5
PSR-A1000
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-A1000!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully
so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced
and convenient functions of the PSR-A1000.
We also recommend that you keep this manual
in a safe and handy place for future reference.
PSR-A1000
6
Accessories
■
PA-300 AC Adaptor
*
■
Floppy Disk [includes style files, song files and MIDI Driver (page 138)]
■
Music Stand (page 17)
■
Data List
■
Owner’s Manual
* May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.
Also, a separate Data List is provided.
Introduction (page 3):
Please read this section first.
Quick Guide (page 20):
This section explains how to use the basic functions.
Basic Operation (page 35):
This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.
Reference (page 49):
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-A1000’s various
functions.
Data List :
Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
Trademarks:
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument. For example, the voice or style name appearing in the LCD screens in
this manual may differ from that of the actual instrument.
* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.
* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE
data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
7
PSR-A1000
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disk
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,
towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the
slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into
place and the eject button pops out.
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data
is not being written to the floppy disk.
If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in
the following operations, the messages “Now
executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”
appears in the display.
• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data
(page 39 - 41).
• Naming files and folders (page 38); creating a new
folder (page 41).
• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 134);
formatting the disk (page 134).
• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
when the data is being written to the floppy disk.
Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk
drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;
the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is
fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.
• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject
properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-
pressed position with the disk extending from the
drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do
not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since
using force in this situation can damage the disk drive
mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially
ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,
or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the
eject procedure.
• Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data read and write errors.
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will
eventually cause read and write errors.
• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-
available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
• Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
Compatible Disk Type
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks
Drive lamp
When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at
the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the
drive can be used.
Eject button
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
PSR-A1000
8
To handle floppy disks with care:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy
disks in their protective cases when they are not in
use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,
since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase
data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are
attached in the proper location.
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position
(tab open).
Data backup
• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
you keep two copies of important data on separate
floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to
Disk function on page 134.
About the Display Messages
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.
When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.
About the Floppy Disks
write-protect tab open
(protect position)
I
F
J
G
H
For this example, press the
[G] (YES) button to
execute formatting.
You can select the desired
language from the Help dis-
play (page 46).
9
PSR-A1000
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... 3
Accessories ............................................................... 6
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)
and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7
About the Display Messages.................................... 8
Application Index................................................... 12
What can you do with the PSR-A1000?................. 14
Setting Up the PSR-A1000 ..................................... 16
Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18
Quick Guide ........................... 20
Playing the Demos ................................................. 20
Song Playback ........................................................ 21
Playback of Songs ....................................................21
Playing Voices ........................................................ 25
Playing a Voice ........................................................25
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26
Playing Different Voices with the Left and
Right Hands..........................................................27
Playing Styles ......................................................... 28
Playing a style..........................................................28
Style Sections...........................................................30
Playing with the Songs .......................................... 32
Playing Along with the PSR-A1000...........................32
Recording ................................................................33
Setting an Oriental Scale ....................................... 34
Basic Operations
— Organizing Your Data ....... 35
Example — Open/Save display for Voice..................36
Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 37
File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 38
Naming Files/Folders ...............................................38
Moving Files/Folders ................................................39
Copying Files/Folders...............................................40
Deleting Files/Folders...............................................40
Saving Files ..............................................................41
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............41
Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................41
Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................41
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 43
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 44
Help Messages ....................................................... 46
Using the Metronome............................................ 47
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 47
Tap Tempo ..............................................................48
Reference
Playing the Demos.................49
Voices.....................................51
Selecting a Voice .................................................... 51
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds
Simultaneously .................................................... 53
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 53
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and
Right Sections of the Keyboard ............................ 54
Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 54
PITCH BEND Wheel................................................ 55
Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 55
Styles......................................56
Playing a style ........................................................ 56
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 58
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 58
Chord Fingerings.................................................... 59
Arranging the Style Pattern
(SECTIONS: MAIN A/
B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)..................................61
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys
(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 62
Selecting Intro and Ending Types
(INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 63
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 63
The Multi Pads .......................64
Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 64
Chord Match .......................................................... 64
Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 65
Song Playback........................66
Compatible Song Types ......................................... 66
Song Playback ........................................................ 67
Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 67
Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................... 69
Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 69
Muting Specific Parts
— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 70
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 70
Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 71
PSR-A1000
10
Using Oriental Scales –
Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/
Scale Memory ........................ 72
Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting............. 72
Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......... 72
Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory .... 74
Saving Your Scale Settings .................................... 74
Recalling the Scale Setting .................................... 75
Saving and Recalling
Custom Panel Setups
— Registration Memory ........ 76
Registering Panel Setups
— Registration Memory...................................... 76
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.................77
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 78
Editing Voices
— Sound Creator ................... 79
Operation ............................................................... 79
Sound Creator Parameters .................................... 80
Recording Your Performances
and Creating Songs
— Song Creator ..................... 83
About Song Recording........................................... 83
Quick Recording..................................................... 84
Multi Recording ..................................................... 85
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 87
Operation ................................................................87
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............89
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto
Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord)..............90
Select the Recording Options: Starting,
Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode........... 92
Editing a Recorded Song ....................................... 93
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel.......93
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16...................................96
Editing Chord Events — CHD...................................97
Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)
..97
Inputting and Editing Lyrics .....................................98
Customizing the Event List — Filter..........................98
Creating Accompaniment Styles
— Style Creator ..................... 99
About Creating Accompaniment Styles ................ 99
Style File Format .................................................. 100
Operation ............................................................. 100
Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 101
Step Recording..................................................... 102
Assembling an Accompaniment Style
—Assembly ........................................................ 103
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 104
Change the Rhythmic Feel
— Groove and Dynamics ................................... 104
Editing the Channel Data...................................... 106
Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 107
Creating Multi Pad
— Multi Pad Creator ............109
Operation ............................................................. 109
Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 110
Start recording...................................................... 110
Stop recording...................................................... 110
Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 111
Adjust the Volume Balance
and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console ................112
Operation ............................................................. 112
Setting the Level Balance and Voice
— Volume/Voice ............................................... 113
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 114
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 114
Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 115
Effect Structure ..................................................... 117
Making Global and Other
Important Settings
— Function...........................118
Operation ............................................................. 118
Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune................. 120
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 120
Setting Song-related Parameters
— Song Settings................................................ 121
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related
Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point,
and Chord Fingering......................................... 122
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 122
Setting the Fingering Method
— Chord Fingering ............................................ 123
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard
— Controller...................................................... 123
Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 123
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose
— Keyboard/Panel............................................. 125
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set..................................................... 126
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration
Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 126
11
PSR-A1000
Introduction
Quick Guide
Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data
Playing the Demos
Voices
Styles
The Multi Pad
Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator
Song Playback
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups
- Registration Memory
Using Oriental Scales - Scale Setting/
Scale Tuning/Scale Memory
Editing Voices - Sound Creator
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
- Song Creator
Creating Accompaniment Styles
- Style Creator
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
- Mixing Console
Making Global and Other Important Settings
- Function
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
Appendix
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................126
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice
Settings — Voice Set...........................................127
Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 127
Setting the MIDI Parameters............................... 129
Making Overall System Settings
(Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................129
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................130
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................131
Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................131
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............131
Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 132
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............132
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number
Indication — CONFIG 2......................................133
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk...................134
Entering Your Name and Language Preference
— Owner............................................................135
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset ......................135
Using Your PSR-A1000
with Other Devices.............. 136
Using the Headphones (PHONES jack)...................136
Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through
an external audio system, and recording the
sounds to an external recorder
(AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) ..................................136
Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller
(FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................137
Connecting external MIDI devices
(MIDI terminals) .................................................137
Connecting to a Computer
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................138
What’s MIDI?.........................................................139
What You Can Do With MIDI.................................142
Data Compatibility.................................................142
Disk format ............................................................142
Sequence Format...................................................143
Voice Allocation Format .........................................143
Troubleshooting.................. 144
Specifications ...................... 146
Index ................................... 148
PSR-A1000
12
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular
application and situation.
Listening
Listening to the internal songs................................................................................................................ page 67
Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 69
Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 49
Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 51
Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-A1000................................................................ page 113
Playing
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 125
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54
Changing the sound
Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 54
.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 115
Adjusting the Level Balance................................................................................................................. page 113
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79
Playing the auto accompaniment
Playing the accompaniment automatically............................................................................................. page 56
Practicing
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 47
Recording
Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 84, 85
Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 87
Creating your original settings
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79
Creating accompaniment styles.............................................................................................................. page 99
Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 109
13
PSR-A1000
Application Index
Settings
Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 76
Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 120
Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 121
Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 122
Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 125
Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 129
Connecting the PSR-A1000 to other devices
Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 139
Recording your performance.............. ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136
Raising the volume ............................ ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136
Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 138
Quick solution
Basic functions of the PSR-A1000 and how you can best use it.......................................................pages 12, 14
Resetting the PSR-A1000 to the default setting
........................“Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset” on page 135
Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 144
PSR-A1000
14
What can you do with the PSR-A1000?
SONG
Playback previously recorded
songs (page 21, 32, 66)
Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs
as well as songs on commercially
available disks.
DEMO
Explore the Demos
(page 20, 49)
These not only showcase the
stunning voices and styles of
the instrument, they introduce
you to the various functions
and features — and give you
hands-on experience using the
PSR-A1000!
STYLE
Back up your performance with Auto
Accompaniment (page 28, 56)
Playing a chord with your left hand automatically
plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an
accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,
etc. — and let the PSR-A1000 be your backing
band!
DIGITAL RECORDING
Record your performances
(page 83, 99)
With the powerful and easy-to-use song
recording features, you can record your
own keyboard performances, and create
your own complete, fully orchestrated
compositions — which you can then save to
the USER drive or a floppy disk for future
recall.
SCALE SETTING/
SCALE MEMORY
The Scale Setting feature lets you
easily lower the pitches of specific
notes by 50 cents to create your own
oriental scales. Up to six scale
settings can be stored for instant
recall (Scale Memory), whenever you
need them.
15
PSR-A1000
LCD
The large LCD (together with
the various panel buttons)
provides comprehensive and
easy-to-understand control of
the PSR-A1000’s operations.
SCALE TUNING
You can select a desired scale
template including oriental
scales and create your own
scales by fine tuning the scale
notes.
VOICE
Enjoy a huge variety of realistic
voices (page 25, 51)
The PSR-A1000 features a wealth of
exceptionally authentic and dynamic
voices — including piano, strings,
woodwinds, and more!
TO HOST terminal
Make music with a computer — quickly and
easily (page 138)
Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of
computer music software. Connections and setup
are exceptionally easy, and you can play back
your computer recorded parts with different
instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-
A1000!
Multi Pads
Add spice to your performance with special dynamic
phrases (page 64, 109)
By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short
rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original
Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the
keyboard.
PSR-A1000
16
Setting Up the PSR-A1000
1
Make sure that the PSR-A1000’s STANDBY/ON
switch is at the STANDBY (off) position.
2
Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300.
3
Connect the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-A1000’s
DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear panel.
4
Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the
nearest electrical outlet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-
300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an
incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-
A1000, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS
UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET
WHEN THE PSR-A1000 IS NOT IN USE.
CAUTION
Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor)
during any PSR-A1000 record operation! Doing so can result in
a loss of data.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity
is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not
using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to
unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
When you have made all the necessary connections
(page 136) between your PSR-A1000 and any other
devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned
down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in
your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI
slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,
amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI
operation and prevents speaker damage.
When powering down the setup, first turn down the
volume for each audio device, then switch off each
device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then
MIDI).
Power Supply
DC IN
To electrical outlet
Power-on Procedure
MIDI master (transmitting device)
Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)
12345678910111213141516LR
PSR-A1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)
POWER
ON!!
17
PSR-A1000
CAUTION
In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected
electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the PSR-A1000
before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and
amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the PSR-A1000
after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and
amplifier.
CAUTION
Even when the switch is in the "STANDBY" position,electricity is still
flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the
PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC
power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
n
Before you switch your PSR-A1000 on or off, first turn down the vol-
ume of any connected audio equipment.
1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.
→ The main display appears in the display.
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the
[STANDBY/ON] switch again.
→ Both the display and the drive lamp (at the
bottom left of the drive) will turn off.
2 Adjusting the display contrast
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the
contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST]
knob on the rear panel.
3 Setting the volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME]
dial to adjust the volume to
an appropriate level.
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the PSR-A1000 panel indicate standards/
formats it supports and special features it includes.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard
which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will
play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or
synthesizer from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly
expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard
with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and
effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By
using the PSR-A1000 XG voices, it is possible to record XG-
compatible song files.
XF Format
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future. The PSR-A1000 is capable of
displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.
(SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files.
The PSR-A1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and
records “song” data using SMF Format 0.)
Disk Orchestra Collection
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback
compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and
MIDI devices.
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format,
which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality
automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
types. The PSR-A1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional
SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator
feature.
Powering Up
STANDBY
ON
MAIN
BACK NEXT
LEFT
LAYER
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
LCD
CONTRAST
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
Music Stand
The PSR-A1000 is supplied with a music stand that can
be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the
slot at the rear of the control panel.
PSR-A1000
18
Panel Controls and Terminals
POWER
[STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17
WHEEL
PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 55
PHONES
[PHONES] jack................................................................... P. 136
METRONOME
[METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 47
SONG
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 70
[TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 70
[TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 70
[REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 70
[REC] button......................................................................... P. 83
[TOP] button......................................................................... P. 69
[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 67
[REW] button........................................................................ P. 69
[FF] button............................................................................ P. 69
STYLE
STYLE buttons..................................................................... P. 56
SCALE SETTING
[SCALE SETTING] buttons.................................................. P. 72
SCALE MEMORY
[MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 74
[SCALE MEMORY] buttons ................................................. P. 74
MASTER VOLUME
[MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17
STYLE CONTROL
[ACMP] button ......................................................................P. 57
[BREAK] button....................................................................P. 61
[INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 63
MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 61
MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 61
MAIN [C] button.................................................................... P. 61
MAIN [D] button.................................................................... P. 61
[ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 63
[AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 63
[FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 62
[SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 62
[SYNC.START] button ..........................................................P. 57
[START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 57
DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 79
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button...................................... P. 83, 99
[MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 112
MENU
[DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 49
[HELP] button....................................................................... P. 46
[FUNCTION] button............................................................ P. 118
C1
CLICK
36
T
37
S
39
F1
41
R
G1
43
L
D2
50
M
E2
52
H
42 44
A1
45
L
B1
47
M
C2
48
H
51
F2
L
53
G2
H
5554 56
A2
57
L
D3
62
H
B2
59
M
L
C3
60
M
H
58 61
C
1
63
R
1
E3
64
F3
65
R
66
G3
67
S
D1
38
E1
40 46 49
1
2
3
5
20
19
6
10
11
12 13
14
9
7 8
15
17
16
23 31
32
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
33
34
35
39
40
41
36
37
38
42
21
51
18
71
72
73
4
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
19
PSR-A1000
DISPLAY CONTROL
[A] - [J] buttons..................................................................... P. 37
[DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 44
[BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 58
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 58, 69
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ................................................. P. 35 - 42
[BACK] button ................................................................ P. 37, 43
[NEXT] button................................................................. P. 37, 43
VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 53
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 53
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 53
[ENTER] button.................................................................... P. 43
[DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 43
[EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 37
[LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17
VOICE EFFECT
[LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 55
[TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 54
[SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 54
[HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 55
[MONO] button..................................................................... P. 55
[DSP] button......................................................................... P. 54
[VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 55
VOICE
VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 51
TRANSPOSE
[E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 125
TEMPO
[E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 47
[TAP TEMPO] button............................................................P. 48
UPPER OCTAVE
[UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 55
SCALE TUNING
[SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... P. 72
MULTI PAD
[1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 64
[STOP] button....................................................................... P. 64
REGISTRATION MEMORY
[FREEZE] button..................................................................P. 78
[1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 76
[MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 76
FLOPPY DISK
Floppy disk drive (3.5")........................................................... P. 7
Connectors
[TO HOST] terminal ...........................................................P. 138
[HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 138
MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 137
[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack...................................... P. 137
[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 136
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 136
OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................... P. 136
DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 136
A3
69
C
2
B3
71
R
2
68 70
C4
72
H
73
L
D4
74 75
H
E4
76
L
F4
77
H
78
L
G4
79
H
80
L
A4
81 82
B4
83
H
C5
84
L
85
S
87
D5
86
L
E5
88
H
F5
89
L M
90
G5
O
91
A5
9392 94
B5
95
C6
96
46
44
43
49
65
50
55
61
62
59
60
56
63
64
52 53 57 5854
47
45
77
78
48
69
70
76
7574
66
67
68
38
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Quick Guide
20
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing the Demos
The PSR-A1000 features an extensive variety of Demo
songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its
dynamic rhythms and styles.
What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo
functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of
all the important features and functions of the instrument
— letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the
PSR-A1000 in your own music.
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the
demo songs.
When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-A1000 even better with these functions:
• Song playback (page 21)
• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).
Reference
on page 49
Demo button
BACK NEXT
For this example, FUNCTION
is selected. Function Demos
demonstrate each of the
different functions on the
PSR-A1000.
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo
categories.
Voice Demos showcase the
voices of the PSR-A1000.
Style Demos introduce you
to the rhythms and accom-
paniment styles of the PSR-
A1000 (page 49).
1 Press the [DEMO] button
automatically plays
back the Demo
songs at random.
3
Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.
For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button.
All of the function demos are played back in sequence.
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
For details about the Demos,
refer to page 49.
Song Playback
Quick Guide
21
Song Playback
Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of
the PSR-A1000 come together — in songs!
The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-A1000. Refer to pages 66, 142 for more details on the
logos.
Playback of Songs
1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.
Reference
on page 67
Song related buttons
Floppy disk drive
BALANCE and
CHANNEL buttons
Make sure that the Lan-
guage setting for the instru-
ment (page 135) is the same
as that of the file name of the
song that you are playing
back.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM
standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 7.
CAUTION
Song Playback
Quick Guide
22
2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.
D
A
E
B
C
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.
In the example display at left, the PRESET page is
selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected.
PRESET (Songs for Demos)
FLOPPY DISK (commercially available
songs, your own songs, etc.)
From the MAIN display (the
display shown when the
power is turned on), you can
select songs, voices, accom-
paniment styles, etc.
D
A
E
B
C
Song Playback
Quick Guide
23
4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file.
5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.
6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —
letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly!
1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.
• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the
lyrics on the display during playback. See page 71 for details.
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF
81 2 3 4 5 6 781 2 3 4 5 6 7
If the STYLE tab is
selected, press this button
again.
Song Playback
Quick Guide
24
7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels
of the individual parts — the song, the style, and your playing.
1) Press the [BALANCE] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.
8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
BALANCE
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
You can call up a full set of
mixing controls by pressing
the [MIXING CONSOLE]
button (page 112).
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
• The [FADE IN/OUT] but-
ton (page 62) can be used
to produce smooth fade-
ins and fade-outs when
starting and stopping the
song, as well as the
accompaniment.
Playing Voices
Quick Guide
25
Playing Voices
The PSR-A1000 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try
playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how
to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.
Playing a Voice
1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for
selecting MAIN voice.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
2 Select a voice group.
Reference
on page 51
Voice related buttons
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
I
F
J
G
H
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 53 for more
information.)
Yo u ’ll want to hear the MAIN
voice all by itself — so make sure
that the LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
Turn MAIN on.
For this example, STRINGS
is selected.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the memory
location of the voice. For this
example, PRESET is
selected.
Playing Voices
Quick Guide
26
3 Select a voice.
4 Play the voices.
Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also
have the PSR-A1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲]
button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously
1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn
the LAYER part on.
2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.
3 Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up
the “CHOIR & PAD” group.
4 Select a voice.
For example, select “Gothic Vox.”
5 Play the voices.
Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich
sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the
previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve
selected here.
And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:
• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 79).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 76).
D
A
E
B
C
For this example,
”Strings” is
selected.
Press the corresponding buttons to select the
other pages — and discover even more voices.
Press the [8▲] button to start the
Demo for the selected voice. To stop
the Demo, press this button again.
There’s more to the Demo features
than just voices, though–for more
information, see page 49.
• You can instantly jump
back to the Main display
by “double-clicking” on
one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
Playing Voices
Quick Guide
27
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT
part on.
2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.
3 Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play
rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.
4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the
MAIN display.
For example, select “Symphon. Str.”
5 Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 122). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that
separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button
and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 122.)
6 Play the voices.
The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while
the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or
voices).
MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right
hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.
7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
D
A
E
B
C
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
Split Point
LEFT
MAIN/LAYER
EXIT
Playing Styles
Quick Guide
28
Playing Styles
The PSR-A1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own
performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion
accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.
Playing a style
1 Select a style group and a style.
2 Turn ACMP on.
The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” area, and chords played
in this area are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the
selected style.
Reference
on page 56
Style related buttons
D
A
E
B
C
For this example,
VienneseWaltz is selected.
For this example, DANCE &
BALLROOM is selected.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to
select the memory location of the
style. For this example, PRESET is
selected.
Auto Accompaniment
area
Split Point
ACMP
• The point on the keyboard
that separates the auto
accompaniment area and
the right-hand area of the
keyboard is called the
“split point.” Refer to
page 122 for instructions
on setting the split point.
Playing Styles
Quick Guide
29
3 Turn SYNC.START on.
4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary.
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its
original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.
6 Try playing other chords with your left hand.
For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 59.
7 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.
And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:
• Easily create your own original styles (page 79).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 76).
Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects
This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your
right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.
1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.
2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).
3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the
keyboard.
The PSR-A1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 127).
The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.
• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of
the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 54).
SYNC.
START
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
area
The Tempo can also be
adjusted by using the [TAP
TEMPO] button (page 48).
VARIATION
MONOTOUCH
SUSTAIN
DSP
HARMONY/
ECHO
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE EFFECT
For details about Harmony/
Echo types, refer to the sep-
arate Data List.
Playing Styles
Quick Guide
30
Style Sections
Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic
style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,
Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional-
sounding arrangements.
1 - 3 Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.
4 Press the [INTRO] button.
5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section.
6 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]
button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure
on the next page.)
7 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if
necessary.
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in
the Main sections.
8 Press the [ENDING] button.
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is
finished, the style automatically stops.
INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section.
MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,
and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed.
BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your
performance sound even more professional.
ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically.
INTRO
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
BREAK
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
area
INTRO
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
BREAK
or
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
INTRO
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
BREAK
Playing Styles
Quick Guide
31
■ Accompaniment Structure
Other Controls
FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 62)when starting and stopping
the style.
TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details,
see page 48.
SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in
the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your
performance. For details, see page 62.
INTRO (page xx)
MAIN VARIATION
Press the [ENDING] button.
INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C
ENDING (page xx)
ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C
INTRO D
ENDING D
You can have the
ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by
pressing the [ENDING]
button again while the
ending is playing back.
MAIN
VARIATION
A
MAIN
VARIATION
C
MAIN
VARIATION
B
MAIN
VARIATION
D
via BREAK
via BREAK
via BREAK
via BREAK
(max. four patterns)
(max. four patterns)
INTRO (page 63)
ENDING (page 63)
• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by
simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.
• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth
note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.
• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.
• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.
• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.
FADE
IN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
SYNC.
STOP
Playing with the Songs
Quick Guide
32
Playing with the Songs
Playing Along with the PSR-A1000
In this section, try using the PSR-A1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you
play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform.
1 - 4 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.
5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.
6 If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.
If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ ] [ ]
buttons.
8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
Reference
on page 66
Song related
buttons
(R)
TRACK
1
To cancel the left hand part,
press the [TRACK 2] button.
D
A
E
B
C
If the selected song does not
contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed.
• If you want to start the song right
away without an intro, use the Sync
Start function. To set Sync Start to
standby, simultaneously hold down
the [TOP] button and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button. Song
playback starts automatically the
moment you start playing the melody.
• If you can hear the PSR-A1000 play-
ing the melody part as well, check
the channel setting for the melody
part in the song data, and change
the channel assigned to Track 1
(page 121). You can also change the
song channel itself permanently
(page 94).
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
Playing with the Songs
Quick Guide
33
Recording
The PSR-A1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your
keyboard performance.
1 - 3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.
4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording.
5 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.
6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.
7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button.
8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 35, 41).
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
REC
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
REC
The recorded data will be
lost if you turn off the power.
To keep your important
recordings, you’ll need to
save them to the User drive
or floppy disk.
CAUTION
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
Setting an Oriental Scale
Quick Guide
34
Setting an Oriental Scale
The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your
own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory),
whenever you need them.
1 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press the button
corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button lights). Press again to return to normal
pitch.
2 The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function.
While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY
buttons. You can recall the memorized setting by pressing the appropriate
button at any time.
Reference
on page 72
Scale related
buttons
To maintain the memorized
scale settings even after the
power is turned off, make
sure to save the settings as
a file (page 74).
In the SCALE TUNE display,
you can select a desired
scale template including ori-
ental scales and create your
own scales by fine tuning the
scale notes (page 72).
35
PSR-A1000
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
The PSR-A1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and
registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-A1000; you can also
create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument.
All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer.
Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the
PSR-A1000 in files and folders.
Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these
displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data
efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder.
The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN
display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
The following Open/Save dis-
play types are also available;
however, these are selected
from displays other than the
MAIN display (page 135
).
• SYSTEM SETUP
• MIDI SETUP
• USER EFFECT
Open/Save display for
Song (page 67)
handles the Song files.
Open/Save display for
Voice (page 51)
handles the Voice files.
Open/Save display for Style
(page 56)
handles the Style files.
Open/Save display for
Registration Bank (page 77)
handles the Registration Bank
files.
Open/Save display for
Multi Pads (page 64, 109)
handles the Multi Pad Bank
files.
If the MAIN screen is not dis-
played, press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button followed by
the [EXIT] button.
Open/Save display for Scale
Bank (page 72)
handles the Scale Tune Bank
files.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
36
Example — Open/Save display for Voice
Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.
BACK NEXT
PRESET drive
The files that are pre-
programmed and installed
internally to the PSR-A1000 are
kept here. Preset files can be
loaded but cannot be re-written.
However, you can use a preset
file as a basis for creating your
own original file (which can be
saved in the USER or FLOPPY
DISK drive).
USER drive
Files kept here are those
containing your own original
data, created or edited using the
various functions of the PSR-
A1000. They are stored internally
to the PSR-A1000.
FLOPPY DISK drive
You can also store your original
data to floppy disk.
Commercially available disk
software can also be called up
here. Naturally, these files are
available only when the
appropriate disk is inserted in
the floppy disk drive.
File
All data, both pre-
programmed and your own
original, are stored as “files.”
Current Memory
“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you
select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the
SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved
as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.
Recording songs (page 83) and creating accompaniment styles
(page 99) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to
properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or
files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.
Calls up the upper
level directory page.
In this example, the
voice folder selection
page can be called
up.
Changes drives among
PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
37
PSR-A1000
Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file.
First, press the VOICE [PIANO] button to call up the display containing the files.
This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files).
The PSR-A1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices
created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.
Selecting Files and Folders
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
END
1
Select “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY
DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT]
button.
2
Use the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to
turn the pages.
When the available number of pages
exceeds eight, the bottom of the display
changes as shown below.
Press Next
Press Prev.(previous)
3
Select the file/folder.
There are two ways to select the file/folder:
• Press the [A] - [J] button.
Press the letter button corresponding to the
file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example
display shown above, the voice files are
shown.)
• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the
[ENTER] button.
When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the
highlight moves among the available files/
folders. Highlight the desired file or folder
(voice files are shown in the example above)
and press the [ENTER] button to call up the
selected item.
Double-clicking the
appropriate [A] -[J] button
calls up the corresponding
file and returns to the MAIN
display.
Highlighting the desired file
and double-clicking the
[ENTER] button calls up the
corresponding file and
returns to the MAIN display.
Press the [EXIT] button
to go back to the MAIN
display.
You can go back to the
previous display by
pressing the [EXIT]
button.
Exiting from small pop-up
windows
You can also exit from small
pop-up windows (such as in the
illustration below) by pressing
the [EXIT] button.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
38
Naming Files/Folders
You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or
renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to
rename, copy them beforehand (page 40) and use them as User files/folders.
File/Folder-related Operations
END
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 35).
The NAME display appears.
2
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] -
[J] buttons.
To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
Input the new name (page 42).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
A file/folder name can con-
tain up to 50 half size letters
(or 25 Hiragana and kanji let-
ters), including the Icon ID
(see the note below) and the
extension.
The file name will appear on
your computer as follows. If
you change the Icon ID or
the extension, the icon may
change or the file may not be
properly recognized.
ABCDE.S002.MID
File ID Icon ID
Extension
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
39
PSR-A1000
Moving Files/Folders
You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.
END
1
Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 35).
The CUT display appears.
2
Select the desired file/folder for moving.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] -
[J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel
the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY
DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to
release or cancel the selection.
3
Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
This operation cannot be
used to directly move a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, cut and paste the file or
folder from the first floppy
disk to the USER page, then
change disks and paste it to
the FLOPPY DISK page.
All files/folders in a floppy
disk can be copied to
another disk in one batch
(page 134).
4
Call up the destination display.
Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.
Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.
The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.
After being pasted, the files
are automatically re-ordered
in alphabetical order and
displayed.
About files/folders in a
floppy disk
In the FLOPPY DISK page
of the Open/Save display,
only the files which can be
handled in that Open/Save
display will appear — even
though a folder in a floppy
disk can contain different
kinds of files.
In the case of a folder cut-
and-paste operation (for
floppy disk), an entire folder
can be cut; however, only the
specific files which can be
handled in the current Open/
Save display will be pasted.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
40
Copying Files/Folders
You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.
Deleting Files/Folders
You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.
END
1
Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 35).
The COPY display appears.
2
Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J]
buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the currently selected folder (PRESET/
USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to
“ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.
3
Press the [7▼] (OK)
button.
To stop the operation,
press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
This operation cannot be
used to directly copy a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, copy and paste the file
or folder from the first floppy
disk to the User page, then
change disks and paste it to
the Floppy Disk page.
4
Call up the destination
display.
Only the USER and FLOPPY
DISK pages can be selected
as the destination.
Press the [4▼]
(PASTE) button.
The file/folder you copied
is now pasted at the
destination.
Please note that the copy
functions are intended for
your personal use only.
END
1
Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 35).
The DELETE display appears.
2
Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK)
button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select
another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even
those from other pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder
again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders
in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the
[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button
changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the
selection.
Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
The message “Are you sure you want to delete the
“******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.
YES ......... Deletes the highlighted item.
NO ........... Exits from the prompt without deleting.
When several files have been selected, the message
“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or
data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.
YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or
skips the highlighted item without deleting
(NO).
YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once.
CANCEL ....Exits from the prompt without deleting.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
41
PSR-A1000
Saving Files
This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current
memory (page 36) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK
drives.
If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to
the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective
Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 35, 36).
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder
This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new
folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections.
Displaying Upper Level pages
Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from
the file level pages.
Entering Characters and Changing Icons
The internal memory capac-
ity of the PSR-A1000 is about
260KB. Memory capacity for
2DD and 2HD floppy disks is
about 720KB and 1440KB,
respectively. When you store
data to these locations, all file
types of the PSR-A1000
(Voice, Style, Song, Registra-
tion, etc.) are stored together.
The files of commercially
available DOC software and
Yamaha Disklavier software,
and their edited files on the
PSR-A1000, can be stored
in the USER page, but can-
not be copied to another
floppy disk.
Folder directories can con-
tain up to four levels.
The maximum total number
of files and folders which can
be stored is 400, but this
may differ depending on the
length of the file names.
The maximum number of
files which can be stored in a
folder will be 250.
Enter a name for the new file (page 42).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
1
Press the [6▼]
(SAVE) button.
Enter the name of the new folder (page 42).
Press the [8▲](OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
1
Call up the page to
which you wish to
create a new folder
and press the [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 35).
The following types of characters are
available:
CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size),
numbers (half size), marks (half size)
case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half
size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.
Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing
the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon
at the left of the file name.
1
Press the [1▼]
(NAME), [6▼]
(SAVE), or [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 35).
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
42
Entering Characters
The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the
same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.
1
Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
2
Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.
Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.
To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.
If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the
[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the
[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is
deleted.
3
To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)
Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button
(before actual entry of the character.)
■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)
You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a
character by moving the cursor.
Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the
[8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.
■ Entering numbers
Press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a
while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected.
The following half-size
marks cannot be used in
naming files and folders:
¥ \ / : * ? “ < > |
In the case of characters
which are not accompanied
by special character marks,
you can call up the mark list
by pressing the [6▼] button
after selecting a character
(before actual entry of a
character).
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
43
PSR-A1000
Changing the Icon
You can also change the icon that
appears at the left of the file name.
Call up the ICON SELECT display by
pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from
the character input display (page 42).
Select the desired icon by using the
[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the
[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter
the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]
(OK) button.
This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual
function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.
■ Adjusting values
You can change parameter values by
rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the
example [BALANCE] display, turning
the dial adjusts the volume of the part
in reverse display (highlight). To adjust
the volume of another part, first select
the part by pressing the [
▲▼] button
corresponding to the part, then rotate
the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
■ Selecting items
You can select the desired item or
function in the display by rotating the
[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item
can then be called up or executed by
using the [ENTER] button.
In the example VOICE display, you
can select the desired voice file with
the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up
the selected item by pressing the
[ENTER] button on the panel.
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Cancels the icon selection operation.
Turns pages
for icon
selection.
Enters the
selected icon.
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial
DATA ENTRY
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
44
With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional
button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the
appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that
display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 123).
Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 45) for a list of the displays that can be called up
with the Direct Access function.
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays
DIRECT
ACCESS
DIRECT
ACCESS
ACMP
Here’s a convenient way to
return to the MAIN display
from any other display:
Simply press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then the
[EXIT] button.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
45
PSR-A1000
Direct Access Chart
Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function
See pages
SONG [TRACK1]
FUNCTION
SONG SETTING
TRACK1 CHANNEL selection 121
[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection 121
[EXTRA TRACKS]
121
[REPEAT]
[METRONOME] UTILITY METRONOME settings 132
[REC] —
[TOP] —
[START/STOP] —
[REW] —
[FF] —
STYLE [POP & ROCK] [LATIN & JAZZ]
FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 122
[DANCE & BALLROOM]
[] []
[] []
[USER]
SCALE SETTING buttons
SCALE TUNE BANK
SCALE TUNE BANK 72
SCALE MEMORY [MEMORY]
SCALE TUNE EDIT 74
[1]–[6]
STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 122
[BREAK]
MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART)
VOLUME/VOICE
VOICE settings
113[INTRO] PANPOT settings
MAIN [A] VOLUME settings
MAIN [B]
FILTER
HARMONIC CONTENT settings
114
MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings
MAIN [D]
EFFECT
REVERB settings
115[ENDING/rit.] CHORUS settings
[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings
[FADE IN/OUT]
FUNCTION
UTILITY FADE IN/OUT setting
122
[SYNC. STOP]
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT
SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting
[SYNC. START] —
[START/STOP] —
DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] —
[DIGITAL RECORDING] —
[MIXING CONSOLE] —
MENU [DEMO]
FUNCTION
UTILITY
LANGUAGE selection 135
[HELP] LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 133
[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 129
[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode
[BALANCE]
MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE
VOLUME settings
113
[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings
[NEXT] —
[BACK] —
VOICE PART [MAIN]
MIXING CONSOLE TUNE OCTAVE settings 114[LAYER]
[LEFT]
[SCALE TUNING] SCALE TUNE BANK SCALE TUNE BANK 32
[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display
[ENTER] —
VOICE EFFECT [LEFT HOLD]
FUNCTION
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT
SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 122
[TOUCH] CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 125
[SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT REVERB settings 115
[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 127
[MONO]
MIXING CONSOLE
TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 114
[DSP]
EFFECT
DSP settings
115
[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection
VOICE [PIANO]
FUNCTION VOICE SET settings 127
[ORGAN & ACCORDION]
[GUITAR]
[TRUMPET]
[SAX & FLUTE]
[STRINGS]
[CHOIR & PAD]
[SYNTHESIZER]
[XG]
[]
[PERCUSSION]
[USER]
TRANSPOSE
[]
FUNCTION
CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 125
[] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 114
TEMPO [ ]
FUNCTION
MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 129
[]
[TAP TEMPO] UTILITY TAP settings 133
UPPER OCTAVE [ ] —
[] —
MULTI PAD [1]
MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT 64
[2]
[3]
[4]
[STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR REPEAT / CHORD MATCH settings 110
REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 126
[1]
REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 77
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[MEMORY]
FUNCTION
REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 126
PEDAL [PEDAL1]
CONTROLLER
PEDAL1 function assignment
123
[PEDAL2] PEDAL2 function assignment
WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings 114
E
E
E
E
E
E
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
46
The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-A1000.
Help Messages
HELP
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
BACK NEXT
EXIT
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
2-1 Select the desired
Help topic.
2-2 Call up the
topic.
Select the Language, if necessary. The
language selected here are also used for
various “Messages” shown during operations.
Help messages can be displayed in
any one of the following languages:
ENGLISH
GERMAN
FRENCH
When two or more pages available,
use this to select different pages.
Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual
setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word
(using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to
the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.
3
Press this to return
to the previous
display.
END
1
The language can also be selected in
the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”
(page 135) display.
2
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
47
PSR-A1000
The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and
check how a specific tempo sounds.
The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME]
button. Adjust the
tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below).
To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.
This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of
a song or an accompaniment style.
Using the Metronome
METRO-
NOME
The sound, volume level,
and the beat (time signature)
of the metronome can all be
changed (page 132).
Adjusting the Tempo
TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
RESET
Songs and accompaniment
styles have been given
default (initial) tempo
settings, designed to best
suit the song/style.
TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
RESET
EXIT
Press either the TEMPO [ ]
button or the [] button.
Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ]
[] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
The number in the display indicates how many
quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The
range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,
the faster the tempo.
When you change the tempo, both tempos of the
current song and style will be changed to the same
tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)
tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ]
buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo
Indications — MAIN display” (page 48) for more
about tempo.
1 2
Press this to
close the
TEMPO display.
END
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
PSR-A1000
48
Tap Tempo
This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.
Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or
the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.
■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display
There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.
Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]
button produces a tapping
sound. You can change this
sound, if desired (page 133).
n
You can also use Tap Tempo
to automatically start the
song or accompaniment
style at the desired tempo.
While both the song and
accompaniment style are
stopped, tap the [TAP
TEMPO] button several
times, and the selected
accompaniment style starts
automatically at the tempo
you tapped. While a song is
set to Sync. Start stand-by
(page 57, 67), tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button starts
the song playback in the
same manner. For songs
and styles in 2/4 and 4/4
time, tap four times; for 3/4
time, tap three times; for 5/4
time, tap five times.
TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
RESET
Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice
to change the tempo.
1
Playback the song or the
accompaniment style
(page 56, 67).
2
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
song (unless the tempo has been
changed manually).
Indicates the current tempo for the
selected song, accompaniment
style or the metronome which is
now playing back. When nothing is
playing back (stopped), this
indicates the tempo for the selected
style. When the song and style are
played back simultaneously, the
tempo of the style is automatically
changed to match the tempo of the
song, and is displayed here. This
tempo is used for recording when
recording a song or
accompaniment style.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
accompaniment style (unless the
tempo has been changed
manually).
49
PSR-A1000
Reference
Playing the Demos
The PSR-A1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices
and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared
showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-A1000.
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
2-3 Press one of these buttons
twice — once to select the
desired demo, and once
again to start it.
2-2 Use these to select
different display pages.
Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting
from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only
from the FUNCTION page.
All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one
at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button;
however, all demo songs are played back in sequence.
Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos
(otherwise available in step 3 below).
2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.
Function Demos........ These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000.
Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000.
Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-A1000.
1
Pressing the [DEMO] button
automatically plays back the Demo songs
at random.
2
Playing the Demos
PSR-A1000
50
EXIT
END
Return to the MAIN screen.
I
F
J
G
H
ENTER
MAIN
BACK NEXT
LEFT
LAYER
This example shows the Sound System
in the FUNCTION demo.
3
For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and
the Demo starts playing.
Select the desired word or item by using the
[DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]
button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.)
to call it up.
Use the [BACK][NEXT]
buttons in the introduction
screen to call up the previ-
ous or next page.
n
Press the SONG [START/
STOP] button to stop the
Demo song. To start the
Demo again from the point
at which it was stopped,
press the SONG [START/
STOP] button again.
Rewind and fast-forward
can also be used with the
Demo songs (page 69).
51
PSR-A1000
Voices
The PSR-A1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings
and brass — and many, many more.
Selecting a Voice
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
I
F
J
G
H
2
Select the desired voice group.
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 53 for more
information.)
Yo u ’ll want to hear the
MAIN voice all by itself —
so make sure that the
LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
1
Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call
up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.
When you select a voice
group, the last selected
voice will automatically be
selected.
Turn MAIN on.
Voices
PSR-A1000
52
Voice Characteristics
The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name.
Cool!
These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount
of memory and some very sophisticated programming.
Sweet!
These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so
finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!
Drum
Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the
keyboard.
SFX
Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.
Keyboard Percussion
When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special
effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and
percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even
though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical.
Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
END
EXIT
4
Play the keyboard to hear the
selected
voice.
Press this to return
to the MAIN
display.
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
3-3 Select the voice.
3-1 Select the
memory
location of
the voice
(PRESET/
USER/
FLOPPY
DISK).
Press this to start the
demo of the selected
voice. To stop the demo
at any time, press this
button again.
Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.
Indicates that the display is for
selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).
3-2 Select the
various pages
in the current
voice group.
3
Selecting a voice automati-
cally selects the best-suited
effect and other settings for
that particular voice. You can
disable this so that settings
are not automatically
selected (page 127).
n
You can set how much the
volume of the voice changes
according to your playing
strength (page 125).
n
For a list of the available
voices, refer to the separate
Data List.
n
You can set whether the
voice bank and program
change numbers (“MSB-
LSB-Program Change num-
ber” at the right above the
voice name) are displayed or
not (page 133).
n
XG is a major enhancement
of the GM System level 1 for-
mat, and was developed by
Yamaha specially to provide
more voices and variations,
as well as greater expressive
control over voices and
effects, and to ensure com-
patibility of data well into the
future.
Voices
53
PSR-A1000
The PSR-A1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these
three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.
Playing a layer of two voices
Playing two voices separately — on the left
and right sections of the keyboard
Playing three different voices — one on the
left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of
two on the right
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
LAYER part
MAIN part
LEFT part
MAIN part
Split point
Left range Right range
LEFT part
MAIN part
Split point
LAYER part
Left range Right range
I
F
J
G
H
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
EXIT
END
1
Press this to
turn the LAYER
function on. To
turn it off, press
the button again.
There is an alternate way for
quickly selecting both the
MAIN and LAYER voices
from the panel: While hold-
ing down one panel voice
button, press a second
voice button. The first
selected voice becomes the
MAIN voice, and the second
becomes the LAYER.
2
Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which you
can select the specific voice you want to play in a
layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a
voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN)
display (page 51).
Press this to
return to the
MAIN
display.
Voices
PSR-A1000
54
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard
This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.
■ TOUCH
This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no
matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.
■ SUSTAIN
When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You
can also set the Sustain depth (page 82).
■ DSP
The PSR-A1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process
the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such
as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give
the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can
completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part
(MAIN/LAYER/LEFT).
I
F
J
G
H
1
Set the LEFT to
ON. Press this
button again to
set it to OFF.
MAIN
LEFT
LAYER
2
Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which
you can select the specific voice you want to play
in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the
way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 51).
The split point can be freely
set to any key on the key-
board. (page 122).
n
Each part (MAIN, LAYER,
and LEFT) can have its own
volume setting (page 58).
n
You can also use the LAYER
and LEFT functions
together, to create a combi-
nation layer/split. To do this,
set separate voices for the
left and right sections of the
keyboard (as indicated), and
set up a layer of two different
voices on the right.
EXIT
END
Press this to
return to the
MAIN display.
Applying Voice Effects
VARIATION
MONOTOUCH
SUSTAIN
DSP
HARMONY/
ECHO
LEFT
HOLD
VOICE EFFECT
Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.
For explanations on each of the effects, see below.
The DSP and VARIATION
effect types and the their
depth can be selected and
adjusted in the MIXING CON-
SOLE display (page 115).
Voices
55
PSR-A1000
■ VARIATION
This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected
type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 115), this lets you switch the rotor speed between
slow and fast.
■ HARMONY/ECHO
This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section
of the keyboard (page 127).
■ MONO
This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a
time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the
lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last
note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.
Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the
Portamento effect, when playing in legato.
■ LEFT HOLD
This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the
same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when
used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the
auto accompaniment area of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to
Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment
sound.
Use the PSR-A1000 PITCH BEND wheel to
bend notes up (roll the wheel away from
you) or down (roll the wheel toward you)
while playing the keyboard. The PITCH
BEND wheel is self-centering and will
automatically return to normal pitch when
released.
The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously
transposed up or down by one octave.
You can add special empha-
sis to melody lines you play
over chords by using the
Layer function with a mono-
phonic voice. Set the Main
voice to play polyphonically
and set the Layer voice to
play monophonically
(MONO). In this case, the
melody you play — including
the top notes of any chords
— sounds monophonically.
Try this using the following
voices.
MAIN voice
: Brass Section
(polyphonic) +
LAYER voice
:
Sweet Trump (monophonic)
The Portamento effect creates
a smooth pitch glide between
successively played notes.
PITCH BEND Wheel
PITCH BEND
The maximum pitch bend
range can be changed
(page 114).
Adjusting the Octave setting
More detailed octave-related
settings for each part can be
made by using the Mixing
Console function
(page 114).
UPPER OCTAVE
RESET
PSR-A1000
56
Styles
The PSR-A1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz,
Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected
Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you
play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
Playing a style
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
2-2 Select a Style.
2-1 Select a location
(Preset, User,
Floppy Disk) for
saving the style.
When you've opened a lower directory's
display, this button (UP) lets you call up
the next higher directory, from which you
can select Style groups.
1
2
For a list of the available
accompaniment styles,
refer to the separate
Data List.
Styles
57
PSR-A1000
ACMP INTROBREAK
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
Auto Accompaniment area
Split point
END
When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto
accompaniment area of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the
range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)
Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.
The Tempo can be adjusted
using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or
[TAP TEMPO] button.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button, the tempo will adjust to
the same speed that you tapped.
You can set the key range
for auto accompaniment
(page 122).
• You can begin the rhythm
channels (tracks) of the
Style by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
• The rhythm channels of
the style can also be
started by tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button.
With the style stopped,
tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button three, four or five
times (three for 3/4 time,
four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,
five for 5/4 time).
When you simultaneously
play back accompaniment
styles with a song, the
accompaniment parts
recorded to the song (chan-
nels 9 - 16) are temporarily
replaced by the selected
accompaniment style — let-
ting you try out and use dif-
ferent accompaniment with
the song (page 68).
Turn ACMP off.
3
4
5
6
Sync. Start
Enabling this lets you start
the style simply by playing
the keyboard.
As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment area, the style starts. For
details about chord fingerings, refer to page 59.
Accompaniment Style Characteristics
The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.
Session!
These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with
chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of
certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all
songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass
chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.
Piano Combo! (Floppy Disk)
These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since
this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.
START/STOP
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
Stop the style.
Styles
PSR-A1000
58
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
Rhythm starts.
1
Select a style (page 56).
The Rhythm channels are
part of the styles. Each style
has different rhythm pat-
terns.
Set to off.
3
Play along with the rhythm playback.
The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that
you tapped.
2
Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button
again to stop the rhythm playback.
END
You can also start the
rhythm simply by playing a
key on the keyboard, if Sync
Start is enabled (turn on the
[SYNC.START] button).
BALANCE
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF
BALANCE display
Adjust the output level of the Part.
Parts played from the
keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/
LEFT)
STYLE part (Auto
Accompaniment area)
SONG part
MULTI PAD part
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]
button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to
only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for
the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply
press the appropriate channel button again.
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data
(page 141). The channels
are assigned as shown
below.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
Call up the
BALANCE
display.
Call up the
Channel ON/
OFF display.
Styles
59
PSR-A1000
The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of
fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 123), and select the Chord Fingerings. The
page shows how to play chords with your left hand.
SINGLE FINGER
Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,
seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment area of
the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used.
MULTI FINGER
The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings,
so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you
want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER
operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the
root of the chord.
FINGERED
This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto
accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord
types listed on the next page.
FINGERED ON BASS
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note
played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing
you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major
chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).
FULL KEYBOARD
This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar
to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,
playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord
with your left hand and a melody note with your right.
AI FINGERED
This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three
notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).
AI FULL KEYBOARD
When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-A1000 will automatically create appropriate
accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to
worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many
songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.
This mode is similar to FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the
chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9
th
and 11
th
chords cannot be played.
Chord Fingerings
For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key
and a black key to its left.
For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a white key to its left.
For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the
root key and both a white and black key to its left.
Chord detection in the AI
Full Keyboard mode occurs
at approximately 8th-note
intervals. Extremely short
chords — less than an 8th
note in length — may not be
detected.
In Full Keyboard mode,
chords are detected based
on the lowest and second
lowest notes you play. If the
two lowest notes fall within a
single octave, those two
notes determine the chord. If
the lowest note and the sec-
ond lowest note are sepa-
rated by more than one
octave, the lowest note
becomes the bass and the
chord is determined from the
second lowest note and the
other notes played in the
same octave.
AI
Artificial Intelligence
Styles
PSR-A1000
60
* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.
Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing
Display for root “C”
Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C
Ninth [9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C9
Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6
Sixth ninth [6
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C6
9
Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7
Major seventh ninth [M7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM7
9
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7
11
]
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7
CM7
11
Flatted fifth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7
5
] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CM7
5
Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4
Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - 5 Caug
Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug
Minor [m] 1 - 3 - 5 Cm
Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9
Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6
Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7
Minor seventh ninth [m7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm7
9
Minor seventh eleventh [m7
11
] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm7
11
Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7
9
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7
5
] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7
5
] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7
5
Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim
Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7
Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7
Seventh flatted ninth [7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7
9
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7
13
] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7
13
Seventh ninth [7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C7
9
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7
11
]
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7
C7
11
Seventh add thirteenth [7
13
] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C7
13
Seventh sharp ninth [7
9
] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7
9
Seventh flatted fifth [7
5
] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7
5
Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)
C
Cm
C7
( )
CM7
( )
C9
C6
9
( )
Caug
Cm6
Cm7
( )
Cm7
5
CmM7
5
Cm7
9
( )
Cm9
CmM7
( )
CmM7
9
( )
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
9
( )
C7
13
( )
C7
9
( )
C7
13
Csus4
C7
5
C6
( )
( )
CM7
9
CM7
11
( )
CM7
5
C
5
( )
C7
11
C7
9
( )
C7aug
Cm7
11
( )
( )
CM7aug
( )
C7sus4 Csus2
• Notes in parentheses can
be omitted.
• For FINGERED, FIN-
GERED ON BASS, and AI
FINGERED, if you play
any three adjacent keys
(including black keys), the
chord sound will be can-
celed and only the rhythm
instruments will continue
playing (Chord Cancel
function). This let you play
back only the rhythm.
• Playing two same root
keys in the adjacent
octaves produces accom-
paniment based only on
the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) pro-
duces accompaniment
based on the root and the
fifth.
• The auto accompaniment
Style will sometimes not
change when related
chords are played in
sequence (e.g. some
minor chords followed by
the minor seventh).
• You can also have the
PSR-A1000 “teach” you
how to play Fingered
chords. From the CHORD
FINGERING display
(page 123), specify the
chord you want to learn,
and the notes you should
press are indicated in the
display.
Styles
61
PSR-A1000
The PSR-A1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Areas that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching
among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-
sounding arrangement in your performance.
Arranging the Style Pattern
(SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)
You can also use this func-
tion to play only rhythms
(page 58).
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
Auto Accompaniment area
Split point
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
1
Select a style (page 56).
2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.
2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section
before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.
2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on.
3
The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto
Accompaniment area of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.
4
Press this button to add breaks.
• If you press the [INTRO]
button, you can play back
an Intro section while an
accompaniment is play-
ing.
• You can dynamically con-
trol the level of the
accompaniment by how
softly or strongly you play
the keys in the Auto
Accompaniment area of
the keyboard (page 122).
• If you press the [SYNC.
START] button while an
accompaniment is play-
ing, the accompaniment
will stop and the PSR-
A1000 will enter Synchro-
nized Start standby sta-
tus.
• You can also change
style sections by using
the pedal (page 123).
• The Break section lets
you add dynamic varia-
tions and breaks in the
rhythm of the accompani-
ment, to make your per-
formance sound even
more professional. If you
press the [BREAK] but-
ton while an accompani-
ment is playing, the fill-in
will play back for one
measure.
• The indicator of the desti-
nation section (MAIN A/
B/C/D) will flash while the
Break is playing.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and the
MAIN [A][B] [C][D] but-
ton is pressed after the
final half beat (eighth
note) of the measure, the
fill-in will begin from the
next measure.
2
• Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO],
[MAIN], [ENDING] but-
tons
LED is green
— The section is not
selected.
LED is red
— The section is cur-
rently selected.
LED is off
— No section data; the
section cannot be
played.
Main sections can be shifted.
Styles
PSR-A1000
62
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, style playback will stop completely when all
keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard are released. Style playback will
start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment area is played.
Fade-in/Fade-out
The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that
gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,
press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in
before starting the style, press the button again.
To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the
fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 132).
• Styles can also be started
by pressing the STYLE
[START/STOP] button.
• You can select the Intro
and Ending type by press-
ing the [E] button in the
MAIN window (page 63).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button while the ending is
playing, the Intro section
will begin playing after the
ending is finished.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and you
press a MAIN button while
the ending is playing, fill-in
accompaniment will
immediately start playing,
continuing with the Main
section.
• You can begin the accom-
paniment by using the
Ending instead of the Intro
section. In this case, the
auto accompaniment
doesn’t stop when the
ending is finished.
• If you select a different
style while the style is not
playing, the “default”
tempo for that style is also
selected. If the style is
playing, the same tempo
is maintained even if you
select a different style.
• When STOP ACMP is set
to on and the accompani-
ment is not playing, you
can play both chords and
bass in the Auto Accom-
paniment area in the key-
board (page 122).
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops
automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by
pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.
5
Auto Accompaniment area
Split point
END
1
Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
2
Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when
SYNC. STOP is turned on.
3
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
You can also use the SYNC.
STOP function by pressing
the auto accompaniment
area/left-hand range briefly
(page 122).
4
The style stops when you release your left hand from the keys.
5
Playing a chord with your left
hand automatically restarts the
style.
Press the [SYNC. STOP]/
[SYNC. START] button
again to stop the style.
Synchro Stop cannot be set
to on when the fingering
mode is set to Full Key-
board/AI Full Keyboard or
the auto accompaniment on
the panel is set to off.
Styles
63
PSR-A1000
Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when
changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In
D
A
E
B
C
D
E
Select a Intro
Select a Ending
3
Play the style using
the Intro or Ending
section (page 30, 31).
1
2
To call up the [MAIN] dis-
play, first press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then press
the [EXIT] button.
Fill
A short phrase used to add
variation to the style.
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
1
2
Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play
(page 30, 31).
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main
sections.
You can also add a fill-in by
pressing the selected MAIN
button again.
To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.
You can temporarily disable
Auto Fill In during a perfor-
mance by pressing the next
Main section’s button twice
quickly.
END
PSR-A1000
64
The Multi Pads
The PSR-A1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that
can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.
1
Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 35).
2
Press any of the Multi Pads.
The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as
soon as the pad is pressed.
The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the
phrase :
• To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.
• To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the
pad or pads you wish to stop.
1
Turn ACMP on (page 57).
2
Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.
In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back.
Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.
Multi Pads
Playing the Multi Pads
• Simply tap any of the Multi
Pads at any time to play
back the corresponding
phrase at the currently set
tempo.
• You can even play two,
three, or four Multi Pads at
the same time.
• Pressing the pad during
its playback will stop play-
ing and begin playing from
the top again.
MULTI PAD
STOP
Chord Match
MULTI PAD
STOP
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
area
The Chord Match on/off sta-
tus depends on the selected
Multi Pad Bank.
The Multi Pad
65
PSR-A1000
This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another.
Multi Pad Edit
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Select the desired Multi Pad(s).
The same as the Open/Save
display on pages 38 and 41.
Calls up the upper
level directory page.
Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 35)
PSR-A1000
66
Song Playback
Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve
recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 83), and commercially available song data. You can use this
highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also
display the lyrics in the LCD.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General
MIDI).
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG
format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard,
providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect
sections and effect types.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC
(Disk Orchestra Collection) format.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s
original MIDI file format.
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG
METRO-
NOME
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
Compatible Song Types
Commercially available
music data is subject to
copyright restrictions, and is
intended only for your own
personal use.
For more information on the
song file types compatible
with the PSR-A1000, see
page 143.
Song Playback
67
PSR-A1000
Playing the Internal Songs
Song Playback
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG
METRO-
NOME
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
END
2-2 Open a folder and
select a song to be
played back.
2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the
[BACK] button.
You can enable the Synchro
Start for the song by simul-
taneously pressing the
[TOP] button and the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton. The song starts as
soon as you play the key-
board. You can also use this
function along with the
Style’s Synchro Start func-
tion (page 57).
n
You can have the volume
automatically fade in and
fade out at the beginning
and end of the song. Simply
press the [FADEIN/OUT]
button at the start of song
playback to fade in the song,
and press it again at the end
of the song to fade out.
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons
(page 47) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.
You can even change the playback speed by tapping out
the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.
1
2
3
The song starts.
To stop the song immediately, press the
button again.
Press the button in order to go back to the
previous screen.
START/STOP
EXIT
If the MAIN screen (at left) is
not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
n
You can also make a variety
of other settings (such as
tempo, voice selection, etc.)
and have them automati-
cally called up when you
play back the song
(page 95).
Songs can also be played
back continuously. Set
SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON
from the SONG SETTING
display (page 121).
Make sure that the Language
setting for the instrument
(page 135) is the same as that
of the file name of the song
that you are playing back.
Song Playback
PSR-A1000
68
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style
When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 -
16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you
to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts
of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of
the song’s chord data.
• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON
• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON
1
Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.
2
Select the desired accompaniment style.
3
Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
4
While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE
section buttons.)
Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.
The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped.
The accompaniment stops
when you stop the song. If
the accompaniment style is
playing and you start the
song, the accompaniment
automatically stops. How-
ever, for internal songs that
use accompaniment styles,
the accompaniment style is
not stopped.
END
Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the
accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.
Song Playback
69
PSR-A1000
Playing Back Songs on Disk
Insert the disk into the drive.
The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions
(page 67), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.
Other Playback-related Operations
■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel
by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the
appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press
that channel’s button again.
Before proceeding, make
sure to read the section
“Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disk” (page 7).
n
You can set whether or not
the PSR-A1000 automati-
cally calls up the first disk
song when a disk is inserted
(page 134).
n
Some song data for the
PSR-A1000 has been
recorded with special “free
tempo” settings. During play-
back of such song data, the
measure numbers shown in
the display will not corre-
spond to the actual measure;
this only serves as a refer-
ence as to how much of the
song has been played back.
n
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
Insert the disk shutter side
first and label face up.
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again
from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,
pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.
Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see
below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button.
When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the
beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.
When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the
[REW] and [FF] buttons.
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
SONG POSITION display
“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the
[J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW]
and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.
BALANCE
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF
Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 58).
Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data. The chan-
nels are assigned as shown
below for the PSR-A1000.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
Song Playback
PSR-A1000
70
This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you
want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play
that part yourself.
This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.
Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
METRO-
NOMEREPEAT
Use this button to turn on/off
the right-hand part.
Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
2
1
Select the song to be played back (page 66).
Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts
(all but the right hand/left hand).
Start the song.
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 47).
All tracks are automatically
set to on when selecting a
different song.
3
To stop the song, press the
button again.
START/STOP
END
You can change the channel
assignments for Track 1 and
Track 2 (page 121), letting
you specify which parts are
muted when pressing the
[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/
[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range
SONG
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
METRO-
NOMEREPEAT
START/STOP
2
1
Play back the song (page 67, 69).
You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by
pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired
end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.
4
Stop the song.
To cancel the Repeat function, press the
button again.
REPEAT
Press this button at the point you want
the repeating phrase to start (Point A).
Press this button at the point you want
the repeating phrase to end (Point B).
3
After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from
point A to point B is played back repeatedly.
Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]
button returns to point A.
Point B cannot be selected
unless Point A has been
selected first.
n
Specifying only Point A
results in repeat playback
between Point A and the
end of the song.
n
The specified A and B
points will be erased when
selecting a different song
number, cancelling the
Repeat function, or select-
ing a different repeat mode
— such as Phrase Repeat
or repeat in Song Chain
Play (page 118).
END
Song Playback
71
PSR-A1000
This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your
performance or song playback.
Displaying the Lyrics
D
A
E
B
C
1
Select the
desired song
(page 67, 69).
3
5
The lyrics are
in reverse
display along
with song
playback.
Stop the song.
To return to the previous page, press the
button.
EXIT
END
The lyrics can be changed
(page 98).
Start the song.
4
2
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG
METRO-
NOME
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG
METRO-
NOME
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
If the selected song does
not contain lyric data, lyrics
are not displayed.
In this example, select
“Lyrics” in the Function
folder of the PRESET
(SONG) page.
If the selected song
contains chord data, chord
names are displayed with
the lyrics.
PSR-A1000
72
Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale
Tuning/Scale Memory
The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of specific notes and create your own
scales. You can change the scale settings at any time — even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be
stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.
The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B).
You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE
SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel.
Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the specific note on and off.
The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all
octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard
in the selected oriental scale.
The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in
1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display.
You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale
notes.
Press the [SCALE TUNING] button located at the right side of display to call up the SCALE TUNE display.
Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting
The [SCALE SETTING] buttons
will light or go out according to
the song playback data.
The Scale Setting function has
no effect on the Drum Kit/SFX
Kit voices.
Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selects the
desired scale
template. BAYAT
and RAST are
two typical
oriental scale
settings.
Determines the base
note for each scale.
When the base note is
changed, the pitch of
the keyboard is
transposed, yet
maintains the original
pitch relationship
between the notes.
Adjusts the scale tuning of
the selected note.
[4
▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps
[5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps
(–64 through
+63)
Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼]
buttons simultaneously to
instantly reset the value to
the factory setting.
The [SCALE SETTING]
buttons will light when the
tuning values of the
corresponding notes are set to
something other than “0”. Also,
the values you set by using the
[SCALE SETTING] buttons are
automatically reflected in the
SCALE TUNE display.
Selects which parts should
be affected by the scale
setting. Select the part to be
set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲/▼]
and set the function ON or
OFF by pressing [8▲/▼].
Cent
A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of
a semitone (100 cents = 1
semitone).
n
You can register your original
scale tunings to a REGISTRA-
TION MEMORY button. To do
this, checkmark “SCALE” in the
REGISTRATION MEMORY
display (page 76).
Selects the note
to be tuned.
When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template name
shown at the top of the display will change to “EDITED
SCALE” indicating some adjustment has been done from the
preset scale template.
Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory
73
PSR-A1000
Scale
■ Equal Temperament
The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This
is the most commonly used tuning in music today.
■ Bayat/Rast
Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.
■ Pure Major/Pure Minor
These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth).
You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.
■ Pythagorean
This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are
collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and
suitable for some leads.
■ Mean-Tone
This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in
tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger
This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on
the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.
The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when
performing period music on the harpsichord.
Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)
The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.
CC
DE
EFF
GA
AB
B
Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Bayat 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0
Rast 0.0 00.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0
Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7
Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7
Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2
Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2
Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8
Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7
Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory
PSR-A1000
74
The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display) are memorized by the
Scale Memory function. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them.
The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as a single file.
Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory
1
Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display.
2
While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons.
The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was previously in the selected location
is erased and replaced by the new settings.
The memorized scale settings here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation (see next section).
Saving Your Scale Settings
I
F
J
G
H
BANK 01
All settings memorized to the buttons
[1]–[6] are referred to as a “bank.” The
banks can be saved to “USER” or
“FLOPPY DISK” as Scale Tune Bank
files.
Press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button and [EXIT]
button to call up the MAIN
display.
1
Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory
75
PSR-A1000
To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE BANK
display (page 72). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to which you
memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light.
The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY button
which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Temperament Scale
settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored.
SCALE TUNE EDIT display
The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale
Settings are shown in the display.
From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings.
Select..... Press the [A]–[C]/[F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6]
buttons. When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corresponding SCALE MEMORY button
lights.
Name .... This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Delete.... This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing
Your Data.”
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a single
Scale Tune Bank file (page 41).
The SCALE TUNE
EDIT display appears.
For details on this
display, see below.
The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK
display by pressing the [8] (▲) button and save the data (page 41).
Recalling the Scale Setting
If you press a SCALE
MEMORY button to which
nothing is memorized, the
current scale settings remain
and nothing changes.
PSR-A1000
76
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-A1000 just as you want — selecting specific
voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those
settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.
This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the
settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you.
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory
END
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
1
Set up the panel controls as desired.
For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List
(Parameter Chart).
Select the desired parameter groups
for the settings you want to register.
You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]
dial to navigate in this display. To
register a parameter group, checkmark
the corresponding box. Groups left
without checkmarks will not be included
in the Registration Memory setting.
This allows you to maintain certain
settings, even when switching among
Registration Memory presets. You can
also use the Freeze function (page 78)
to override the Registration Memory
changes — letting you prevent certain
panel settings from being changed.
Enters a checkmark to the
selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
Removes the checkmark from
the selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
Cancels the registration
and returns to the MAIN
display. You can also use
the [EXIT] button.
Press the desired
number button for
registering the settings.
3
Any data that was previ-
ously registered to the
selected REGISTRATION
MEMORY button (indica-
tor is green or red) will be
erased and replaced by
the new settings.
Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected.
Indicator is red.........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.
Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered.
2
Keep in mind that songs or
styles on disk cannot
registered to Registration
Memory. If you want to
register a disk-based song
or style, copy the relevant
data to “USER” in the
SONG/STYLE display
(page 35) and register the
data separately.
The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the
Save operation explained on the next page.
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
77
PSR-A1000
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups
The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file.
REGISTRATION EDIT display
The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The
names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant
REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.
From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.
Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]
buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on
(indicator is red).
Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
Keep in mind that the size of
the Registration bank files
and the memory space they
occupy depends on the
amount of functions set in
each.
BANK 01
All settings registered to buttons [1]-
[8] are referred to as a “bank.” The
banks can be saved to “USER” or
“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration
bank files.
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button and [EXIT]
button to call up the MAIN
display.
2
Save the settings you’ve
made to the
Registration Memory
buttons as a single
Registration bank file
(page 41).
1
The REGISTRATION EDIT display
appears. For details on this display,
see below.
The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION
BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 41).
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
PSR-A1000
78
You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you
de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you
change the Registration Memory preset.
Recalling the Registered Settings
Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 77).
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are
green) to recall the desired settings.
Selecting the Freeze Settings
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup
You can program your
Registration Memory
presets to be called up in
sequence, in any order you
desire. Once programmed,
the presets 1 - 8 can be
selected in sequence with
the [BACK][NEXT] buttons
or the pedal (page 126).
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
FREEZE MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
1
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Select the Freeze settings.
Enters a checkmark
to the selected box.
2
3
Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze
page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.
4
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the
desired settings.
Removes the
checkmark from the
selected box.
Call up the “FREEZE”
page from the
REGIST.SEQUENCE/
FREEZE/VOICE SET
screen (page 126).
79
PSR-A1000
Editing Voices — Sound Creator
The PSR-A1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by
editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it
as a USER voice for future recall.
• The Voice can be edited in
realtime while playing
back a song/style.
• Keep in mind that adjust-
ments made to the param-
eters may not make much
change in the actual
sound depending on the
original settings of the
voice.
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL
STUDIO
Operation
I
F
J
G
H
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
PART
1
Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the
Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the
voice you wish to edit.
Indicates the
parameters available
for editing in this
display. These
correspond to the
parameters/values
shown at the bottom
of the display.
Select the desired menu by
pressing the [NEXT]/
[BACK] button.
Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving
the edited voice as a User voice (page 41).
Select the desired menu.
The selected menu is highlighted.
Can be used during editing to compare
the sound of the original voice with the
edited voice.
4
Save the edited voice to the USER drive
(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 41).
The voice can also be
selected in the SOUND
CREATOR display.
2
Press the
[SOUND
CREATOR]
button.
3
Edit the voice parameters.
The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail starting on page 81.
The settings are lost if the
edited part's voice is
switched to another voice.
Important data should be
saved to User Drive or floppy
disk.
5
Press the [USER] button to select the
edited voice, and play the keyboard.
CAUTION
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
PSR-A1000
80
Sound Creator Parameters
The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.
COMMON
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.
COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.
SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice.
EFFECT Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.
HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.
Common parameter Other location
MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55
PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 114
FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 114
FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 114
REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115
CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115
DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 54
DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115
DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55,115
HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127
Keep in mind that there are
certain parameters whose
Sound Creator settings
affect only the Main part’s
voice.
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Set the volume of the current edited
voice.
Set the portamento time of each
part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)
(page 114).
Determines the touch sensitivity, or
how greatly the volume responds to
your playing strength.
0 —– – Produces more dramatic
level drops, the more softly
you play.
64
—
– Normal response.
127— Produces high volume for
any playing strength (fixed)
Shift the octave range of the
selected voice up or down in
octaves. When the Main or Layer
part’s voice is used, the M/LYR
parameter is available; when the
Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT
parameter is available.
This determines whether the voice
is played monophonically (page 55).
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
81
PSR-A1000
SOUND
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.
■ FILTER
FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a
certain frequency range.
■ EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce
many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion
sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.
• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum
level after the key is played. The higher the value, the
slower the attack.
• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain
level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher
the value, the slower the decay.
• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after
the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the filter, EG, and
vibrato settings (see below).
In addition to making the
sound either brighter or
more mellow, Filter can be
used to produce electronic,
synthesizer-like effects.
Cutoff frequency
Volume
Frequency
(pitch)
Cutoff range
These frequencies are
“passed” by the filter.
• BRIGHTNESS
Determines the cutoff frequency or
effective frequency (resonance) range of
the filter (see diagram). Higher values
result in a brighter sound.
Resonance
• Harmonic Content
Determines the emphasis given to the
cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS
above (see diagram). Higher values result
in a more pronounced effect.
Resonance
Volume
Frequency
(pitch)
Time
Level
Key on
Key off
ATTACK RELEASE
DECAY
If RELEASE is set to a large
value, the sustain becomes
long.
Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-
PSR-A1000
82
■ VIBRATO
• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.
• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).
• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the
playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see
diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato
onset.
EFFECT
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.
HARMONY
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79.
The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 128.
VIBRATO
Creates a wavering in the
sound by periodically chang-
ing the pitch.
DEPTH
SPEED
DELAY
Time
Level
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
The same as the “Mixing Console”
on page 115.
Determines the Sustain depth
of each voice when the
[SUSTAIN] button is set to on.
Determines the DSP type.
For information on the effect
structure, see page 117; for a list of
available effect types, refer to the
separate Data List.
83
PSR-A1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
— Song Creator
With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store
them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 84), which lets you
record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 85), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording
(page 87), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard
performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to
internal memory or floppy disk (page 35, 41).
About Song Recording
■ Quick Recording (page 84)
This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano
song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand
and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your
right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right
hand and the auto accompaniment.
■ Multi Recording (page 85)
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create
the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each
instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can
also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with
your own performance.
■ Step Recording (page 87)
This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note
individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise
recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play.
■ Song Editing (page 93)
The PSR-A1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick
Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
SONG
METRO-
NOME
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1 REPEAT
DIGITAL RECORDING
• The internal memory capacity of
the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB.
Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks is about 720KB and
1.44MB, respectively. When you
store data to these locations, all file
types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice,
Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are
stored together.
• Songs recorded on the PSR-
A1000 are automatically recorded
as SMF (Standard MIDI File format
0) data. For details on SMF, see
page 143.
• Playback of the recorded song
data can be transmitted from MIDI
OUT, letting you play the sounds of
a connected external tone genera-
tor (page 130).
• The volume level of each channel
of the song can be adjusted from
the Mixing Console and the set-
tings can be saved. Moreover, even
after you’ve set a voice for your
keyboard play during recording,
you can record voice selections, so
that the voice changes automati-
cally during playback (page 95).
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
84
This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so
you can check your progress.
■ Play back your new song
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the
song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data
(page 35, 41).
Quick Recording
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
REC
EXTRA
TRACKS
(STYLE) (R)(L)
TRACK
2
TRACK
1
■ When creating a new song:
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
1
Select the desired song (page 67, 69).
1
2
Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.
If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.
Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.
3
Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button
corresponding to the track you want to record.
You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the
same time.
To record your keyboard performance:
Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.
To record the auto accompaniment and
multi pad performance:
Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.
To stop recording, press
the [REC] button again.
If the "LAYER" or "LEFT" but-
ton is on before pressing the
REC button, the correspond-
ing Layer and Left parts are
automatically recorded to dif-
ferent channels.
The performance of track 1/2
is recorded to the channel
specified in the SONG SET-
TING display (page 121).
4
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE
[START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by
pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop
function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123).
To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again.
Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song
start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123).
END
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
You can also use the metro-
nome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
You can overdub a second
right-hand performance onto
Track 2 after recording the
first right-hand performance
(including the layer voices)
on Track 1. To do this, set the
[LEFT] button to OFF and
repeat steps 2 and 3.
Turning off the power
automatically deletes your
recorded performance. If
you wish to save the
recording, make sure to
store it to internal mem-
ory (USER drive) or floppy
disk (page 35, 41).
CAUTION
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
85
PSR-A1000
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of
a full band or orchestra.
The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.
About the accompaniment style parts
Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.
Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.
Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.
Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.
Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Channels
Parts
(default settings)
Available parts Channels
Parts
(default settings)
Available parts
1 Voice MAIN
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Multi Pad1
Multi Pad2
Multi Pad3
Multi Pad4
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
9
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 1
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Multi Pad1
Multi Pad2
Multi Pad3
Multi Pad4
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
2 Voice MAIN 10
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 2
3 Voice MAIN 11
Accompaniment style
BASS
4 Voice MAIN 12
Accompaniment style
CHORD1
5 Voice MAIN 13
Accompaniment style
CHORD2
6 Voice MAIN 14
Accompaniment style
PA D
7 Voice MAIN 15
Accompaniment style
PHRASE1
8 Voice MAIN 16
Accompaniment style
PHRASE2
Multi Recording
REC REW FF
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG SYNC. START
REC
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
■ When creating a new song:
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
1
Select the desired song (page 67, 69).
1
2
Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously
holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] -
[8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.
REC......................... Enables recording for the channel
ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel
OFF......................... Mutes the channel
To cancel or disable
recording, press the
[REC] button once
again.
The part is automatically
selected when setting the
several channels to “REC” at
the same time.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
86
D
C
3
Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.
This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the
accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the
recording channels
selected in step #2.
For a list of the initial
default assignments,
see page 85.
When selecting the MIDI
part
• Setting a single channel
to MIDI
All incoming data received
via any of the MIDI chan-
nels 1 - 16 is recorded.
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or control-
ler to record, this lets you
record without having to
set the MIDI transmit
channel on the external
device.
• Setting several channels
to MIDI
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or control-
ler to record, this records
data only over the set
MIDI channel — meaning
the external device must
also be set to the same
channel.
A single part (with the
exception of MIDI parts) can-
not be assigned to several
channels.
4
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the
SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The
recording can be started/stopped by pressing the
foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is
set to the pedal (page 92).
5
To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.
You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the
recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 92).
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton again.
You can also use the metro-
nome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
6
Play back your new song.
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the
beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]
button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the
beginning of the song.
To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.
You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them
while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a
finished song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)
displays (page 96).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store
the recorded data (page 35, 41).
END
Turning off the power
automatically deletes your
recorded performance. If
you wish to save the
recording, make sure to
store it to internal mem-
ory (USER drive) or floppy
disk (page 35, 41).
The settings of the recorded
parts is stored temporarily
until you execute Quick
Recording, select a song, or
turn the power off.
CAUTION
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
87
PSR-A1000
This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is
also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.
Operation
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
PART
1
Select an existing song (page 67, 69) to which
you want to add parts or re-record. If you want
to create a new song, simultaneously press the
[RECORD] button and the [TOP] button.
3
Press the [A] button to call up the Song
Creator display.
D
A
E
B
C
2
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.
4
Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons, select the “1 -16”
tab for recording melodies
and other parts, or select
the “CHD” (Chord) tab for
recording chords, and after
selecting the “1 - 16” tab,
select a record channel
with the [F] (CH) button.
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
5
Call up the Step Record
display by pressing the
[G] button.
I
F
J
G
H
Any voice, effect and other
settings you make in the
Mixing Console are automat-
ically cancelled when you
call up the CHD (Chord)
page.
The voices in the USER and
FLOPPY DISK pages can-
not be selected for Step
recording. You can select
voices from the PRESET
page; however, these may
sound slightly different from
the original voice.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
88
■ Measure/Beat/Clock
■ Velocity
The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.
■ Gate Time
The following settings are available:
Normal ....................... 80%
Tenuto ........................ 99%
Staccato...................... 40%
Staccatissimo.............. 20%
Manual
....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp
Actual
playing
strength
127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Moves the cursor position
up and down.
Returns the cursor to the
beginning of the song (the
first note of the first
measure).
Determines the velocity
(loudness) of the note to be
entered (only when recording
the melody). For information
on velocity settings, see below.
Determines the length of the
note (as a percentage) from
the position at which it is to be
entered. (This is available only
when recording the melody.)
For information on gate time
settings, see below.
Each press of this button toggles
among the three basic note
selectors at the bottom of the
display: normal, dotted, and triplet.
(This is available only when
recording the melody.)
Deletes the event at the cursor.
Use these to move the
selected event, in units of
measures (BAR), beat, and
clocks. For information on
measure/beat/clock settings,
see below.
Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth
notes are available only when recording the melody.)
This also determines the position to which the pointer
will advance after a note has been entered.
6
First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display,
then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.
To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded
data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 41).
END
Measure
Beat
Clock
1
1
000-
1919
2
000-
1919
3
000-
1919
4
000-
1919
2
1
000-
1919
2
000-
1919
3
000-
1919
4
000-
1919
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
89
PSR-A1000
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)
In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording
by guiding you through this actual music example,
shown at right.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88.
■ Play back the newly created melody
Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button
to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be
edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 96).
1
1-1 Select this note.
1-3 ...press this (to input a tie).
1-2 While holding down this note...
2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-1 Select this note.
3
3-1 Press this button to
display the dotted notes.
3-2 Select this note.
3-3
4
4-1 Call up the normal notes
by pressing this button.
4-3
4-2 Select this note.
To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.
▲
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
90
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step
Record (Chord)
The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with
precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord
changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88.
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)
For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.
C F G F G7 C
MAIN A BREAK MAIN B
Enter the chords by using the currently
selected chord fingering method in the Auto
Accompaniment area of the keyboard.
1
Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
C F G
MAIN A
MAIN
C
F
G
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
001:1:000
001:3:000
002:1:000
C F G F G7
MAIN A BREAK
INTROBREAK
F
G7
002:3:000
002:4:000
2
Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
91
PSR-A1000
■ Play back the newly created chord progression
Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the
recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG
CREATOR (CHD) display (page 97). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the
SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.
3
Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.
C F G F G7 C
MAIN A BREAK MAIN B
MAIN
C
003:1:000
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
To enter a fill-in, press the
[AUTO FILL IN] button and
press one of the MAIN [A]–
[D] buttons.
END Mark
An “END” mark is shown in
the display, indicating the
end of the song data.
The actual position of the
End mark differs depending
on the section that is input at
the end of the song. When
an Ending section is input,
the End mark automatically
follows the Ending data.
When a section other than
Ending is input, the End
mark is set two measures
after the final section.
The End mark can be freely
set to any position desired.
▲
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
92
From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.
To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation
steps 1 - 3 on page 87.
About Punch In/Out
This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The
illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out — Rec Mode
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
I
F
J
G
H
Determines the measure at which Punch
In overwrite recording starts (when
“PUNCH IN AT” is selected).
These settings determine how recording will
start.
Normal
Pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button
enables Synchro standby and overwrite
recording starts as soon as you start playing
the keyboard.
First Key On
Overwrite recording starts as soon as you
start playing the keyboard. This setting also
preserves the previous lead-in data, letting
you record over the original lead-in without
erasing it.
Punch In At
The song plays back normally up to the
indicated Punch In measure (set by the
[3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite
recording at that Punch In measure.
These settings determine how recording will stop as well
as what happens to previously recorded data.
Determines the Punch Out
measure — the measure at
which Punch In overwrite
recording stops (when
“PUNCH OUT AT” is
selected).
When this is set to ON, you
can use the foot pedal 2 to
control the punch-in and
punch-out points. (The current
function assignment of the
foot pedal is cancelled.) Press
and hold down the foot pedal
to record. Recording stops
when you release the pedal.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save the
edited data.
Replace All
This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out
This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out At
Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),
then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.
12345678
REC START setting
REC END setting
12345
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Start/start overwrite recording
Original data
Previously recorded data
Newly recorded data
Deleted data
NORMAL
REPLACE ALL
12345678
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT
12345678
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT AT=006
12345
Start/
play back original data
Start/
play back original data
Start/
play back original data
Start/
play back original data
Start/
play back original data
Start/
play back original data
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Stop recording
FIRST KEY ON
REPLACE ALL
12345678
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT
12345678
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT AT=006
12345
PUNCH IN AT=003
REPLACE ALL
12345678
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT
12345 7
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT AT=006
*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not
overwritten, recording starts
from measure 3.
*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]
button at the end of 5 measures.
*1
Start/start overwrite recording
*1
Start/start overwrite recording
*1
*2
Stop recording
*2
Stop recording
*2
Stop recording
*2
Stop recording
*2
Stop recording
*2
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
93
PSR-A1000
Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing
features to change the song data.
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel
Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons.
Quantize
Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following
musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.
Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead
of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to
the specified note value (see below).
■ About Quantize Size
Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the
data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4
note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.
Editing a Recorded Song
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use this to select the
desired edit operation.
Selects the desired channel
to be quantized.
Selects the quantize size (resolution).
See the below for the details.
Determines how strongly the
notes will be quantized. If a
value less than 100% is
selected, notes will be
moved toward the specified
quantization beats only by
the specified amount.
Applying less than 100%
quantization lets you
preserve some of the
“human” feel in the
recording.
Executes the Quantize
operation. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Quantize
results. The Undo function
only has one level; only the
previous operation can be
undone.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization
1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/4 note
1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/16 note +
1/16 note triplet *
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different
note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes
and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to
straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,
both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.
Quantize Size
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
94
Delete
This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel.
Mix
This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the
data from one channel to another.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Deletes all data in the
selected channel. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
These select the channel
to be deleted.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Mix operation.
After the operation is
completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting
you restore the original data
if you’re not satisfied with
the Mix results. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
These let you specify the two
source channels to be mixed.
If “COPY” is selected here, the data
from Source 1 is copied to the
Destination channel.
Determines the channel into which the
mix or copy results will be placed.
All data other than the mixed
note data is derived from the
Source 1 channel.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
95
PSR-A1000
Channel Transpose
This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in
semitone increments.
Set Up
You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing
console or panel controls.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Executes the Channel
Transpose operation. After
the operation is completed,
this button changes to
[UNDO], letting you restore
the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Channel
Transpose results. The
Undo function only has one
level; only the previous
operation can be undone.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel.
Toggles between the two
channel displays: Channels
1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.
To simultaneously set all
channels to the same value,
adjust the Channel
Transpose for one of the
channels while holding
down this button.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the SET
UP operation. Once
SET UP has been
executed, the
operation cannot be
cancelled or undone.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception
of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.
Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the
[TOP] button, and stop playback.
Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.
Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song.
Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played
part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE)
button.
Use this to checkmark the
selected item.
Checkmarked items are
stored with the song.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
96
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16
From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on
page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
Note Events
Parameter Description
Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.
Ctrl (Control change)
Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate
Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
Prog (Program change)
Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to
the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).
P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value.
A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to move the
cursor up/down and select
the desired event.
Determines the channel to
be edited.
For coarse adjustment of the event value.
Calls up the Step Recording
display (page 88).
Calls up the Filter display
(page 98), letting you select
only the events you wish to
shown in the Event List.
Calls up the SONG display,
from which you can save
the edited data.
Holding this button down
while using the [A] and [B]
buttons lets you select
multiple events.
For fine adjustment of the event value.
Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events
are copied and can be pasted to another location.
Adds a new event to the Event List.
Copies all selected events. The
copied events can be pasted to
another location.
Deletes the
event at the
cursor position.
Pastes all cut or copied events to
the selected location.
If the value at the cursor has been
changed, pressing this restores the
original value.
Determines the current
position of the event being
edited.
Returns to the beginning
position of the current song
(the first note of the first
measure).
Use these to move the
cursor left/right and select
the desired parameter of
the highlighted event. Keep
in mind that moving the
cursor away from the just-
edited value automatically
enters that value.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton.
The sound of the voices
recorded with Step recording
may sound slightly different
from the original.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
97
PSR-A1000
Editing Chord Events — CHD
From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events
(page 96).
Chord Events
Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)
From this display, you can edit recorded System events.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The
operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96).
System Events
Parameter Description
Style (Accompaniment
style)
Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select
the desired style.
Tempo Determines the tempo value.
Chord Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.
Sect (Section) Specifies the section — its name and variation.
OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.
CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).
S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.
Parameter Description
ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display. Only
one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data.
Tempo Determines the tempo value.
Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.
Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.
XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the
separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
Press this to convert the
recorded chord and section
entries into song data.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator
PSR-A1000
98
Inputting and Editing Lyrics
This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct
already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to
step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as
those in Editing Note Events (page 96).
In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 67 and 71.
Lyrics Events
Customizing the Event List — Filter
This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for
display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,
remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.
To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or
LYRICS (page 96 - page 98).
Parameter Description
Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.
Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.
Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.
LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
Move the cursor
to the event
containing the
lyric “star.”
3
Use these buttons to call up
the Lyric display, from
which you can input lyrics.
From the Lyric display
(page 42), enter the new
word, “(your name).”
4
Press this button
to save the newly
changed lyric
data.
2
Move the cursor to
the word “star.”
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] but-
ton.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
EXIT
Calls up the Main Filter
display. For more
information on each event
type, refer to the separate
Data List booklet (MIDI
Data Format).
Enters checkmarks for all
items.
Reverses the checkmark
settings for all boxes. In
other words, this enters
checkmarks to all boxes that
were previously un-checked
and vice versa.
Calls up the Control
Change Filter display. For
more information on each
event type, refer to the
separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display.
For more information on each event type,
refer to the separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the
item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”
is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.
Selects the item, scrolling up/
down one item at a time.
Enters/removes the checkmark
for the selected item.
Selects only note data;
checkmarks for all other
boxes are removed.
END
Execute the settings by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
99
PSR-A1000
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just
as with the preset styles.
About Creating Accompaniment Styles
The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section
of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to
the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.
■ Realtime Recording (page 101)
You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the
keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself
— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the
style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your
own custom style.
Realtime Recording Characteristics
• Loop recording
Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can
also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two
measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you
record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.
• Overdub recording
This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original
data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if
you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each
pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while
hearing the previous parts.
■ Step Recording (page 102)
This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows
you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is
ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are
difficult to play.
■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 103)
This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining
various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For
example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you
could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass
pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8
Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one
accompaniment style.
■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 104)
With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve
created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.
ACMP INTRO
START/STOP
MAIN
ENDING
/ rit.
AUTO
FILL IN
FADE
IN/OUT
SYNC.
STOP
SYNC.
START
BREAK
STYLE CONTROL
DIGITAL RECORDING
Section Channel
INTRO A - D
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
BASS, CHORD 1,
CHORD 2, PAD,
PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2
MAIN A - D
FILL IN A - D
BREAK
ENDING A - D
For information on the part
structure of accompaniment
styles, see page 85.
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
8Beat 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
8Beat 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
60’s 8 Beat
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
PSR-A1000
100
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into
a single unified format. By using the edit
functions, you can take full advantage of the
SFF format and freely create your own styles.
The chart at right indicates the process by
which the accompaniment is played back.
(This does not apply to the rhythm tracks.)The
basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the
original style data. This source pattern is
recorded using accompaniment style
recording (see below).
As shown in the chart at right, the actual
output of the accompaniment is determined by
various parameter settings and chord changes
(played in Auto Accompaniment area of the
keyboard) entered to this source pattern.
Source Pattern
1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)
2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)
Pitch Conversion
3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)
Other Settings
5 High Key (threshold of the pitch
conversion)
6 Note Limit (soundable range)
7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of
the chord change)
Output
These are the patterns
recorded to the
accompaniment styles
(page 107).
This data is created by
chords played in the
Auto Accompaniment
area of the keyboard
(page 59).
These settings are
edited from the
PARAMETER display.
These parameters
determine how the
pitch of the source
pattern is converted
when you play chords
in the Auto
Accompaniment area
of the keyboard.
Chord changes (in Auto Accompa-
niment area of the keyboard)
Operation
D
A
E
B
C
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
PART
1
Select the desired accompaniment style
for editing. To record a new
accompaniment style from scratch, call
up the BASIC page in the Style Creator
display and select “New Style” by
pressing the [C] button.
2
4
Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the
operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting
on the next page.
Use the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons to
select the various
pages.
3
Press the [EXIT]
button to close
the STYLE
CREATOR
display.
END
5
Call up the Style display
by pressing the [I]
(SAVE) button (in
Assembly page: [J]
button), then save the
recorded / edited data
to the USER or FLOPPY
DISK page.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
101
PSR-A1000
You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based
on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.
Realtime Recording — Basic
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
END
REC .... Channel is enabled for recording.
ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback.
OFF .... Channel is muted.
Selects an empty style,
allowing you to create a
new style from scratch.
Calls up the display for changing the
tempo or beat (time signature).
When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over
channels containing data. To delete data from a specific
channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press
the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button.
Available only when the channel is set to
[RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete
specific percussion sounds during
recording. Simultaneously hold down this
button and press the key corresponding to
the instrument you want to delete.
2
First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/
STOP] button.
The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern
loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while
listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the
percussion instruments assigned to the keys.
3
Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.
With the REC CHANNEL
display shown, close the
display by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
If you’ve enabled Sync Start
(by pressing the SYNC.
START button), you can
start recording by simply
pressing a key on the key-
board.
1
Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and
pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.
Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data
of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page”
on page 102) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC
CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.
• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can
be selected for the RHY 2
channel.
• For the non-rhythm chan-
nels (BASS - PHR 2), all-
voices with the exception
of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit
can be selected.
To release or cancel the
selection, press the [1▼] -
[8▼] button corresponding
to the channel you wish to
cancel. As long as you
continue to hold down the
[J] button, you can toggle
between deleting and
restoring the selected data.
Releasing the [J] button
permanently deletes the
data. Before recording to
one of the non-rhythm
channels (BASS - PHR 2),
make sure to delete the
existing data of the
appropriate channel.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
PSR-A1000
102
With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to
perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 96).
•
In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating
accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the
selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark
position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.
• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event
data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,
etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).
Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 100) beforehand.
Other Parameters in the Basic Display
[I] (SAVE) button
Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.
[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons
Determines the section to be recorded.
[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons
Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill
In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure.
[D] (Execute) button
Executes the Pattern Length change.
Recording — Precautions
• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord.
All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source
chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of
CM7), keep the following points in mind:
* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the
recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get
optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)
* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that
you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,
providing you use them as short passing tones.)
The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the
section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 107.
• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord
progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to
“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that
would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment
pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.
You can also select the
desired section for recording
by pressing appropriate
panel button. Pressing one
of the Section buttons calls
up the SECTION display,
from which you can change
sections by using the [6▲▼]/
[7▲▼] buttons. To actually
enter the change, press the
[8▲] button.To select the Fill
In section, press the [AUTO
FILL IN] button.
CRC CRC
C = chord note
C, R = recommended note
Step Recording
I
F
J
G
H
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
103
PSR-A1000
This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —
from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step
4 on page 100.
Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
Selects the style section and
channel that will be copied to
the corresponding channels,
selected with the [A]-[D] and
[F]-[I] buttons above.
Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can
assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and
channel that will be copied are playing.
SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM
channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display
(page 102) are played back simultaneously.
ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set
to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101)
are played back simultaneously.
OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC
CHANNEL display (page 101), OFF does not
appear and is not available.
1
These let you select the accompaniment style that
will be used for each channel of your original
style. Select the desired channel by pressing the
[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same
button to call up the Style screen, from which you
can select the accompaniment style.
3
After repeating steps 1 and 2
as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)
button to save the assembled
style data. From here, you can
store the settings of all
channels (RHYTHM 1,
RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a
single accompaniment style.
If you change the section
and channel in steps #1 and
#2, the currently specified
section and channel are also
changed. The channels
being recorded are also
changed and recording is
stopped automatically.
The PLAY TYPE parameter
affects only the playback,
and does not change the
actual accompaniment style
data.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
PSR-A1000
104
Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics
These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment
style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.
■ Groove
Groove parameters
Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is
applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.
Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For
example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are
shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12
Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.
Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.
For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,
6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of
swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.
Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to
be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine
which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early
or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”
types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Calls up the Style display and
lets you store the edited
accompaniment style data.
Executes the Groove operation. After
the operation is completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting you
restore the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Groove results. The
Undo function only has one level; only
the previous operation can be undone.
Determines the settings for each of the
Groove parameters (see the list below).
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
105
PSR-A1000
■ Dynamics
Dynamics parameters
Accent Type Selects the type of accent.
Strength
Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The
higher the value, the stronger the effect.
Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity
value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower
than 100% compress it.
Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above
100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Calls up the Style display
and lets you store the
edited accompaniment
style data.
Executes the Dynamics operation. After the
operation is completed, this button changes
to [UNDO], letting you restore the original
data if you’re not satisfied with the
Dynamics results. The Undo function only
has one level; only the previous operation
can be undone.
Determines the settings for each of the
Dynamics parameters (see the list
below).
Select the desired channel to which
Dynamics is to be applied.
Velocity is determined by
how strongly you play the
keyboard.
The more strongly you play
the keyboard, the higher the
velocity value and, hence,
the louder the sound.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
PSR-A1000
106
Editing the Channel Data
In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded
accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100.
■ Quantize
Refer to page 93.
■ Velocity Change
Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)
buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).
■ Bar Copy
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the
specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the
region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which
the data is to be copied.
■ Bar Clear
This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)
and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared.
■ Remove Event
This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons
to select the desired event type to be removed.
See the explanations below.
Preset channel BASS-
PHRASE 2 can not be
edited.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
107
PSR-A1000
Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter
This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style
change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the
parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 100. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 100.
■ Source Root/Chord
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default
setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data
is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you
change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also
change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 102.
■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)
• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.
Root Trans (Root Transpose)
When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,
E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that
contain melody lines.
Root Fixed
The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key
of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.
When NTR is set to “Root
Fixed” and NTT is set to
“Bypass,” the “Source
Root” and “Source Chord”
parameters are changed to
“Play Root” and “Play
Chord,” respectively. In this
case, you can change
chords and hear the result-
ing sound for all channels.
See the explanations below.
CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR
C
CCC CR
CCC C CR CCC C RC
CRC
RCR
CR CR
C
CR CCR
C
CCR
CC
CR
RRCCC
CC RC
C
CC RC
CC
CR CC
CC
CR C CR
C
CC RC C
C
CR
CCR
CR R RC
CCR
CCC
C
CCC
C
CRC
CC
CCC C
C
CRC CR
CC
CRC CC
C
CCC
CC
CCCR
RCC
CCC
RCC
CRC CRR
C
CRC
RCC
CC
CC
CR CC CCR CR
CMaj
Cm
C7
CM7
CM7
9
C6
9
Caug Cm6
Cm7
Cm7
5Cm7
9
Cm7
11
CmM7 CmM7
9
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
9
C7
13
C7
9
Csus4
Csus2
C1+8
C1+5
C7
5
C6
Cm
9
CM7
11
C7
11
C7
9
C7aug
CM7aug
C7sus4
C9
C7
13
When the Source Root is C:
C = chord note
C, R = recommended
note
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
PSR-A1000
108
• NTT (Note Transposition Table)
This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.
Bypass
No transposition.
Melody
Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Chord
Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano
or guitar-like chordal parts.
Bass
Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on-
bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.
Melodic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by
a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a
semitone. Other notes are not changed.
Harmonic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in
the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth
intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.
■ High Key/Note Limit
• High Key
This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)
of the note transposition for the chord root
change. Any notes calculated to be higher
than the highest key are transposed down to
the octave just below the highest key. This
setting is effective only when the NTR
parameter (page 107) is set to “Root Trans.”
• Note Limit
This sets the note range (highest and lowest
notes) for voices recorded to the style
channels. By judicious setting of this range,
you can ensure that the voices sound as
realistic as possible — in other words, that no
notes outside the natural range are sounded
(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo
sound). The actual notes that sound are
automatically shifted to the set range.
■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)
These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord
changes.
Stop
The notes stop sounding.
Pitch Shift
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.
Pitch Shift to Root
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.
Retrigger
The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.
Retrigger To Root
The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note
remains the same.
CM
C3-E3-G3
FM
F3-A3-C4
F
M
F
2-A
2-C
3
C
M
C
3-F3-G
3
Example — When the highest key is F
Root changes
Notes played
CM
E3-G3-C4
FM
High Limit
Low Limit
F3-A3-C4
C
M
F3-G
3-C
4
Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4
Root changes
Notes played
109
PSR-A1000
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
The PSR-A1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in the
same way as the preset Multi Pads.
MULTI PAD
STOP
Operation
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
PART
BACK NEXT
I
F
J
G
H
1
Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for
editing. To record a new Multi Pad from
scratch, call up the RECORD page in
the Multi Pad Creator display and
select “New Bank” by pressing the [C]
(NEW BANK) button.
2
3
4
Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for
each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page.
Use the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons
to select the
RECORD or
EDIT page.
5
Call up the Multi Pad
display by pressing the
[I] (SAVE) button, then
save the recorded /
edited data to the USER
or FLOPPY DISK page.
Press the [EXIT]
button to close the
MULTI PAD
display.
END
D
A
E
B
C
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
PSR-A1000
110
The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
Start recording
First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start
recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on
for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major
seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).
Stop recording
Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished
playing the phrase.
Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off
■ Repeat
Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the
phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.
■ Chord Match
If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be
automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.
Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
Select the desired Multi
Pad for recording or editing.
You can also select it by
pressing the MULTI PAD
[1] to [4] button.
Selects an empty Multi Pad
bank, allowing you to create a
new Multi Pad from scratch.
Select this to engage
the Record standby
mode (synchronized
standby).
Select this to save the
recorded pad data to
USER or FLOPPY DISK
drive.
Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad
on or off (see below).
Calls up the NAME display to
input the new name.
• Other notes besides those
of the C major seventh
scale can be recorded;
however, this may result in
the recorded phrase not
matching the chord when
being played back.
• The rhythm part of the
currently selected style is
used as a rhythmic guide
(in place of a metronome),
playing back during
recording. However, it is
not recorded to the Multi
Pad.
CRC CRC
C = chord note
C, R = recommended note
Others: non-recommended note
Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator
111
PSR-A1000
With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform
them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109.
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points
described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs
(page 96).
• Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you
to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat
playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.
• Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed.
Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit
I
F
J
G
H
I
F
J
G
H
PSR-A1000
112
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.
You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button
(page 58).
■ About the parameters
• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 113)
This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto
Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 143) with the rich and dynamic voices
that are exclusive to the PSR-A1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your
song playback.
• FILTER (page 114)
These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.
• TUNE (page 114)
These give you various tuning controls.
• EFFECT (page 115)
These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.
Mixing Console
This set of controls
lets you adjust the
balance of the
voices and their ste-
reo position, as well
as the amount of
effect that is applied
to each voice.
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
Operation
MIXING CONSOLE
PART
1
PANEL PART
Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/
Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song.
STYLE PART
Accompaniment parts
SONG CH 1 - 8
Channels 1 - 8 of song playback
SONG CH 9 -16
Channels 9 - 16 of song playback
2
Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.
For information on the various parameters and settings and how
to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 113.
From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button
repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the
button switches among the displays listed below.
You can quickly and easily
set all parts to the same
value for the same parame-
ter (except for the VOICE
parameter). Simulta-
neously hold down the [A] -
[J] button that corresponds
to the parameter you want
to change and use the [1] -
[8] buttons or the [DATA
ENTRY] dial to change the
value.
n
For details on parameters
related to the Sound Cre-
ator, see page 80.
Close the Mixing
Console display by
pressing the [EXIT]
button.
END
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
113
PSR-A1000
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.
Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
PART
Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of
the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special
voices of the PSR-A1000. To use the normal XG
voice set, turn this off.
VOICE
Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 51). When the
Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the
Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.
PANPOT
Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard
left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.
VOLUME
Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts.
Selects the XG voices to
be replaced (voices
usually used when
playing back)
Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices
(when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).
Executes the settings and closes the Auto
Revoice Setup display.
Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without
executing the settings.
1
2
Each press of this
button switches
among the various
parts/channels.
Use these to select the VOICE,
PANPOT, or VOLUME
parameter rows.
Allows you to select
the specific voice to
be replaced.
Keep in mind that using the
Revoice function may result
in unnatural or unexpected
sound, depending on the
particular song data.
ALL REVOICE
Replaces all of the replaceable
XG voices with the rich and
authentic voices of the PSR-
A1000.
BASIC REVOICE
Replaces only the recommended
voices that are suitable for playing
back the song.
ALL NO REVOICE
All the voices are returned to the
original XG voices.
These let you select
the voice of each
part, and adjust the
panpot and volume.
The [RHY2] categories in
the STYLE PART display are
only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit
(percussion) voice.
n
The [RHY1] channel in the
STYLE PART display can be
assigned to any voice except
for the Organ Flutes voice.
n
When playing GM song data,
channel 10 (in the SONG
CH 9 - 16 page) can only be
used for a Drum Kit voice.
When changing the rhythm/
percussion voices (drum
kits, etc.) of the accompani-
ment style and song from
the VOICE parameter, the
detailed settings related to
the drum voice are reset,
and in some cases you may
be unable to restore the
original sound. In the case
of song playback, you can
restore the original sound
by returning to the begin-
ning of the song and playing
back from that point. In the
case of accompaniment
style play, you can restore
the original sound by select-
ing the same style again.
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
PSR-A1000
114
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.
PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 55, 80), this determines the Portamento time. The
higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only
applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).
PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is
from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.
OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The
value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button.
TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
PART
Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.
HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect
(see “Harmonic Content” on page 81).
BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by
adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 81).
Each press of this
button switches among
the various parts/
channels.
For details about the Filter,
see page 81.
n
Be careful with these con-
trols. Depending on the
selected voice, extreme set-
tings may result in noise or
distortion.
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune
Portamento is used to cre-
ate a smooth transition in
pitch from one note to the
next.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO
TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.
These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.
MASTER ...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.
SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback.
KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.
Refer to the explanation below.
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
115
PSR-A1000
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112.
Adjusting the Effects
There are three effect sec-
tions: Reverb, Chorus, and
DSP (which contains a vari-
ety of effect types). For
details, refer to the Effect
Block list (page 116).
SOUND CREATOR
DIGITAL RECORDING
MIXING CONSOLE
DIGITAL
STUDIO
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
PART
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Switches among the
effect sections:
REVERB, CHORUS,
and DSP.
Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information
about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 116.
Press this to edit and store
the effect (page 115, 116).
These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.
BLOCK............Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).
PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only
when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion.”
CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This
parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.
TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The
actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.
1
2
Each press of
this button
switches among
the various
parts/channels.
Indicates the type name for each effect block.
When the BLOCK
parameter is set to
REVERB, CHORUS, or
DSP1-4/DSP, press this
to call up the display
from which you can
change the detailed
settings for the effects.
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
PSR-A1000
116
Effect Block
Block Parts Characteristics Number of User Effect
REVERB
All parts
Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in
a concert hall or jazz club.
3
CHORUS
All parts
Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts
are being played simultaneously.
3
DSP
Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),
Style
In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this
section features a variety of special effects,
including distortion.
3
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
D
A
E
B
C
Determines the
effect block.
Calls up the
display for storing
the effect.
Determines the effect category.
Determines the effect type.
Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.
Determines the level of the
effect (return level). This is not
available when BLOCK is set
to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set
to “CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion.”
Determines the value of the
selected parameter.
Calls up the display
for naming the User
Effect (page 42).
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
3
4
Select the
destination to
which the effect
is to be stored.
The number of
memory spaces
available for the
destination differs
for each block
(refer to the chart
below).
Stores the effect settings you
made above to a User Effect
location (SYSTEM) for future
recall. To call up the effect, select
USER from the CATEGORY
parameter and select the desired
effect from the TYPE parameter.
Keep in mind that in some
cases noise may result if
you adjust the effect param-
eters while playing the
instrument.
Switches between
the upper/lower
parameters. For the
lower parameter,
the depth can be
changed when the
[VARIATION]
button is on.
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
117
PSR-A1000
Effect Structure
The PSR-A1000 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set
with the panel controls.
About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion
All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect
to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects. The
DSP effect can be configured for either System or Insertion routing.
The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return
controls set on the PSR-A1000.
OUT
Rev Send
MAIN VOICE
Dry
Cho Send
DSP Send
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect
(here PART is set to MAIN),
it is put here in the signal flow.
Rev Send
LAYER VOICE
Dry
Cho Send
DSP Send
Rev Send
LEFT VOICE
Dry
Cho Send
DSP Send
Rev Send
STYLE/SONG
(each channel)
Dry
Cho Send
DSP Send
CHORUS
REVERB
DRY LINE
DSP
Chorus Return
DSP Return
Reverb Return
DSP
When DSP is set as a System effect,
it is put here in the signal flow.
PSR-A1000
118
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These
sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-A1000 to your own musical needs and preferences.
Adjusting the Pitch — Master Tune
■ Master Tune (page 120)
This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the
tuning with that of other instruments.
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 121)
These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord
Fingering
■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 122)
These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.
■ Chord Fingering (page 123)
This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can
even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.
FUNCTION
Operation
FUNCTION
HELP
MENU
DEMO
2
Select the desired function.
1
3
Set the parameters of the selected
function.
The operations for each function are
covered in the following explanations.
To return to the previous display, press the
[EXIT] button.
END
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
119
PSR-A1000
Making Settings for the Pedals and
Keyboard — Controller
■ Pedal (page 123)
These settings determine how the connected foot
pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches)
are used. They can be assigned to a variety of
functions, letting you control operations with your
feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/
off, or triggering Fill In patterns.
■ Keyboard / Panel (page 125)
These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the
keyboard (how touch affects volume), and the pitch
transpose settings (for the keyboard, song data, and
entire instrument).
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set
■ Registration Sequence (page 126)
This determines the order in which the Registration
Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.
■ Freeze (page 126)
This lets you specify the settings you want to be
maintained or left unchanged, even when changing
Registration Memory presets.
■ Voice Set (page 127)
This lets you determine whether certain voice-related
settings (such as Effects, Harmony, etc.) are
automatically called up or not when you select a
voice.
Setting Harmony and Echo (page 127)
These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect
applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the
amount of effect.
Making MIDI Settings
■ System (page 129)
These determine various system messages settings
(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well
as Local Control on/off.
■ Transmit (page 130)
This determines how playback data is sent to
connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are
assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also
lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over
each channel.
■ Receive (page 131)
This determines how the parts of the PSR-A1000
respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e.,
which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive
channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to
be received over each channel.
■ Root (page 131)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root
notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.
■ Chord Detect (page 131)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the
chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.
Other Settings — Utility
■ Config 1 (page 132)
This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,
Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.
■ Config 2 (page 133)
From this page, you can adjust the display, and
change the voice number indication.
■ Disk (page 134)
From this page, you can format disks, and copy from
disk to disk.
■ Owner (page 135)
From this page, you can set the language of the
instrument, and input your own name — which is
shown automatically every time the power is turned
on.
■ System Reset (page 135)
This function restores the PSR-A1000 to its original
factory settings. You can also specify which types of
settings are to be restored, as well as store your own
original settings for future recall.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
120
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune
Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune
Hz (Hertz)
This unit of measurement
refers to the frequency of a
sound, and represents the
number of times a sound
wave vibrates in a second.
n
The Tune function does not
affect the Drum Kit or SFX
Kit voices.
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the overall
pitch of the PSR-
A1000, from 414.8 -
466.8 Hz. Press the 4
or 5 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to
instantly reset the value
to the factory setting of
440.0 Hz.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
121
PSR-A1000
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings
Quick Start
On some commercially avail-
able song data, certain set-
tings related to the song
(such as voice selection, vol-
ume, etc.) are recorded to
the first measure, before the
actual note data. When
Quick Start is set to “ON,”
the PSR-A1000 reads all ini-
tial non-note data of the
song at the highest possible
speed, then automatically
slows down to the appropri-
ate tempo at the first note.
This allows you to start play-
back as quickly as possible,
with a minimum pause for
reading of data.
n
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
(page 141). The channels
are assigned as follows:
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
n
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).
Allows you to play back all songs
from the same folder continuously.
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK2] button.
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK1] button.
When set to “ON,” this
automatically sets the proper
Track 1 and Track 2 channels.
Normally, this should be set to
“ON.”
Determines whether the Phrase
Mark Repeat function for the song
is on or off. When this is on, you
can repeatedly play back a
specified phrase (selection of
measures) of the song. The
method for setting a phrase mark
is the same as that in the SONG
POSITION display (page 69).
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
122
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting
and Split Point
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —
Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
These select the part to which the split point
setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand
range, or both. Press the desired key for the split
point while holding down one of these buttons.
The pressed key is included in the range for the
Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard
(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)
Allows you to simultaneously set the split
point for both the left-hand range and the
Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard.
Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords
— even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.
The PSR-A1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 62) simply by
quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the
keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.
Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in
the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard).
Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting
different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).
Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left-
hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each
independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these
buttons by themselves to set the split point value.
About Section Set
When any of the Main A-D
sections is not included in
the accompaniment style
data, the nearest section is
automatically selected. For
example, when Main D is not
contained in the selected
accompaniment style, Main
C will be called up.
L (LEFT)
Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.
A (ACMP)
Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment area of the
keyboard.
About Section Set
When any of the Main A-D
sections is not included in
the accompaniment style
data, the nearest section is
automatically selected. For
example, when Main D is not
contained in the selected
accompaniment style, Main
C will be called up.
About Split Point
Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto
Accompaniment area (ACMP) and left-hand area (LEFT) from the right-
hand area (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the
ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the
LEFT split point.
Split point (A) Split point (L)
Split point (A) + (L)
Auto
Accompaniment
area
Auto Accompaniment area
+ Left-hand area
Left-hand
area
Right-hand
area
Right-hand
area
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
123
PSR-A1000
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering
This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn
how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Making Settings for the Pedals
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the fingering
type (page 59).
This lets you change the root
note from the chord.
This lets you change the
chord type.
Indicates the note that belongs to a
chord in the music.
Indicates the note that
belongs to a chord. Some
notes can be omitted. The
chord name is indicated
next to “CHORD NAME.”
.. Required
.. Can be omitted
.. Either note can be
omitted
.. Can be omitted when
the note indicated by
is omitted
The chord indication in the
display applies to the Fin-
gered method, regardless if
another method is actually
selected.
Chord Tutor
The Chord Tutor feature is
essentially an electronic
“chord book” that shows you
appropriate fingerings for
chords; it is useful when you
want to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired
chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]
buttons, and the fingerings
for the Fingered method are
indicated in the display.
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the particular
pedal to which a function is
to be assigned.
Determines the function to be assigned to the
selected pedal. Any one of the available functions
can be assigned to each pedal.
For information on the assignable functions, see
“Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page.
If necessary, you can turn
the corresponding part ON/
OFF or set the control depth
(see the next page).
Pedal on/off operation may
differ depending on the
particular pedal you’ve
connected to the [FOOT
PEDAL 1/2] jack. For
example, pressing down on
one pedal may turn the
selected function on, while
pressing a different make/
brand of pedal may turn the
function off. If necessary,
use this setting to reverse
the operation.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
124
Pedal-controllable Functions
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if
SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume.
SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any
sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when
pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.
SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to
certain voices — PIANO, for example.
GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.
PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is
produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The
portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 114).
PITCHBEND*
Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel.
MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed
(FOOT PEDAL 2 only)
. Same as the MODULATION wheel.
DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button.
HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.
SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.
STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.
SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.
INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.
MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button.
MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button.
MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button.
MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button.
FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.
FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.
BREAK Break starts playing.
FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.
ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.
FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 59).
BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the
fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.
PERCUSSION
The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4
▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to
select the desired percussion instrument.
MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button.
LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.
LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.
SONG, STYLE, LEFT, LAYER,
MAIN
These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.
HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set
for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only).
UP/DOWN
When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.
OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.
KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular
drum kit used for the pedal.
PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This
determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
125
PSR-A1000
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel
Keyboard Touch
The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to
customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences.
Transpose Assign
This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
HARD 2
Requires strong playing to produce
high volume. Best for players with a
heavy touch.
HARD 1
Requires moderately strong playing for
higher volume.
NORMAL
Standard touch response.
SOFT 1
Produces high volume with moderate
playing strength.
SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even
with light playing strength. Best for
players with a light touch.
Selects the desired
parameter: Keyboard
Touch or Transpose
Assign.
Determines the
Touch sensitivity
setting (Keyboard
Touch only; refer to
the table at right).
Determines the
fixed volume level
when touch is set
to “off” (Keyboard
Touch only).
Determines whether Touch is on or not for the corresponding parts.
The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep
in mind that you can set each voice to a different
touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to
play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can
set this so that the voice is not affected by touch
(page 80).
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
KEYBOARD
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and
the accompaniment styles.
SONG
For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of
the songs.
MASTER
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
entire instrument (keyboard voices,
accompaniment styles, and songs).
Transpose
Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,
accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.
1
Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
2
A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE
ASSIGN, appears.
3
Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song
These settings can be used to match both the song and your
keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say
you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.
The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D,
and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To
match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set
the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.”
This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data
down to your comfortable singing key.
TRANSPOSE
RESET
END
The transpose function
does not affect the Drum
Kit or SFX Kit voices.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
126
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —
Registration Sequence
You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the
appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up
the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze
This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration
Memory presets. For details, see page 78.
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Turns the Registration
Sequence function
on/off. When this is
set to “ON,” the
programmed
Registration
Sequence is shown at
the top right of the
Main display, and you
can step through the
sequence in this
display by using the
[BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons or the pedals.
Determines which pedal is used to advance
(increment) through the sequence.
Determines which
pedal is used to
reverse (decrement)
through the sequence.
Determines how Registration
Sequence behaves when
reaching the end of the
sequence.
Stop
Pressing the [NEXT] button or
the “advance” pedal has no
effect. The sequence is
“stopped.”
Top
The sequence starts again at
the beginning.
Next Bank
The sequence automatically
moves to the beginning of the
next Registration Memory bank
in the same folder.
Indicates the file name of the selected
Registration Memory bank.
Indicates the Registration Memory preset
numbers, in the order of the current
Registration Sequence.
These move the cursor position in the sequence.
Replaces the number at the cursor position with the
currently selected Registration Memory number.
Inserts the number of the currently
selected Registration Memory preset
immediately before the cursor position.
Deletes the number at the
cursor position.
Deletes all Registration
Memory numbers in the
sequence.
Setting Registration
Sequence Enable to “ON”
overrides any other Pedal
settings (for pedals assigned
to “Regist (+) Pedal” and
“Regist (-) Pedal” here).
These include the pedal set-
tings on page 123, and in
Voice Set on page 127.
n
When both “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
are set to “OFF,” the pedals
cannot be used to step
through the Registration
Sequence; only the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons can be used
in the MAIN display.
n
When both “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
are set to the same pedal,
“Regist (+) Pedal” takes
priority.
Registration Sequence data
is included as part of the
Registration Memory bank
file. To save your newly pro-
grammed Registration
Sequence, store the current
Registration Memory bank
file (page 35, 41). Any Reg-
istration Sequence data is
lost when changing Regis-
tration Memory banks,
unless you’ve stored it with
the Registration Memory
bank file.
Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.
END
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
127
PSR-A1000
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set
When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound
Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For
example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the
LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page.
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Use these to select the
desired part.
These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings
(Voice selection, Effects, and Harmony/echo assignment) are
automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings
can be turned on or off independently for each part.
Normally, these should all be
set to “ON.”
Harmony/echo cannot be set
for the Layer and Left parts.
Setting Harmony and Echo
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the Harmony type.
For details, see page 128.
Determines the lowest velocity value at
which the harmony note will sound. This
allows you to selectively apply the harmony
by your playing strength, letting you create
harmony accents in the melody. The
harmony effect is applied when you play
the key strongly (above the set value).
Determines the level of the Harmony effect.
Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill
effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,
Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.
This lets you assign the Harmony
effect to various parts. For details,
see page 128.
When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony
effect is applied only to the note that
belongs to a chord played in the Auto
Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This
parameter is not available when Multi
Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in
Type above.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
128
About the Harmony Types
When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected
When “Multi Assign” is selected
Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to
separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the
second by the Layer voice.
When “Echo” is selected
An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Tremolo” is selected
A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Trill” is selected
Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.
About the Harmony Assignments
AUTO
Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts.
Multi
This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the
Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be
played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.
Main
Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
Layer
Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
Split point
Chords played to the left of the
split point control the harmony.
Harmony notes (based on the chord
and the selected type) are automatically
added to the melody played to the right
of the split point.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
129
PSR-A1000
In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the
USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 139).
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System
Call up the display as described in step 2 above.
Local Control
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-A1000
controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If
you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-A1000’s tone generator
section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to
use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-A1000’s internal voices, and use the PSR-A1000 keyboard to record
notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.
Setting the MIDI Parameters
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
Select the desired template.
2
Call up the Edit display, then
select and set the desired
functions/parameters.
For details about each of the
MIDI edit displays, see the
following pages.
Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)
All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer
and Left.
Master KBD The PSR-A1000 functions as a master
keyboard for controlling external tone
generators or other devices.
KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play
instead of the individual parts (Main/
Layer/Left).
Song All Transmit channels are set to
correspond to the Song channels 1-16.
Use this to play the PSR-A1000 song
data with an external tone generator, or
to record your entire performance to an
external sequencer.
Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and
PSR-A1000 synchronizes with a external
MIDI device.
MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the
keyboard voice and accompaniment
style with a MIDI accordion.
MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI
accordion control the accompaniment
style, as well as play the chord and bass
parts.
MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal controls the bass note of the
accompaniment.
MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal plays the bass part.
MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor
received.
3
Call up the User display
and press this button to
save the newly edited
MIDI settings.
Up to ten setups can
be saved.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
END
The saved settings can be named (page 38)
or deleted (page 40) in the User page.
For editing the Local Control parameters.
For editing the Message Switch
parameters.
For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,
Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop
parameters.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
130
Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop
■ Clock
Determines whether the PSR-A1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an
external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-A1000 is being used alone. If you are using
the PSR-A1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-A1000 to
be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must
be connected to the PSR-A1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.
■ Transmit Clock
Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is
transmitted.
■ Receive Transpose
When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-A1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to
“ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-A1000 keyboard transpose (page 125)
setting.
■ Start/Stop
Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or
style playback.
Message Switch
SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF.
SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment
ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and
type) ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE)..........Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external
equipment ON or OFF.
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit
This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display
* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 131).
Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which
corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.
Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.
Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.
Pitch Bend (PB) See page 124.
After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-A1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that
pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater
expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
FA, FC
MIDI messages for starting/stop-
ping the song or style. The “FA”
message corresponds to start,
and “FC” corresponds to stop.
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the
channel for changing
transmit settings.
Determines the Part for the
selected channel.
Turns transmission of the
specified data type on or off.
See below for details on the
data types.
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1-16) flash briefly
whenever any data is
transmitted on the channel(s).
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
131
PSR-A1000
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive
This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.
MIDI Receive Parts
Setting Root Note Channels — Root
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment
section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the
accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected
regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that
of the ROOT display above.
OFF No MIDI data is received.
SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16
correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.
MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
KEYBOARD
MIDI note data received by the PSR-A1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.
ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2.
ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS.
ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2.
ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD.
ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.
EXTRA PART1-5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument
itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the channel for
changing receive settings.
Determines the Part for the
selected channel. See below for
details about the receive parts.
Turns reception of the specified
data type on or off. See page 130
for details on the data types.
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1 - 32) flash briefly
whenever any data is received
on the channel(s).
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port A of the TO HOST
terminal (Port A of the CBX
driver) correspond to chan-
nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
HOST terminal (Port B of the
CBX driver) corresponds to
channels 17 - 32.
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selects the channels in groups of
eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25
- 32, respectively.
Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.
Sets all channels to OFF.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port A of the TO HOST
terminal (Port A of the CBX
driver) correspond to chan-
nels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
HOST terminal (Port B of the
CBX driver) corresponds to
channels 17 - 32.
When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,”
the root note is detected
from merged MIDI data
received over the channels.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
132
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118.
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and
Tap — CONFIG 1
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time
These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.
Metronome
These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.
Other Settings — Utility
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the time it takes for the
volume to fade in, or go from minimum to
maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Determines the time it takes for the
volume to fade out, or go from maximum
to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Determines the time the volume is held
at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 -
5.0 seconds).
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the level of the
metronome sound.
Determines which sound is used for the metronome.
Bell Off ........................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.
Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.
Determines the time
signature of the metronome
sound.
When you start the song or
accompaniment style, the
values matching to them are
automatically set.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
133
PSR-A1000
Parameter Lock
This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls
— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, or song and sequence data.
Tap Count
This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 48).
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication
— CONFIG 2
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selects the desired
parameter for locking/
unlocking.
Determines whether the selected
parameter is locked (checkmarked)
or unlocked (empty).
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the level of the tap
sound.
Determines the particular sound
used for the Tap Start function.
Any drum or percussion sound
in the Standard Kit (page 52)
can be selected.
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Determines the brightness of
the backlit display.
Determines whether or not the voice bank
and number are shown in the PRESET
page of the VOICE display (page 51).
This is useful when you want to check the
proper bank select MSB/LSB values and
program number to specify when
selecting the voice from an external MIDI
device.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
PSR-A1000
134
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk
• Copying cannot be done
between a 2DD disk and
2HD disk. When copying,
make sure both disk are
the same type.
• Depending on the amount
of data contained in the
original source disk, you
may have to swap the two
disks several times until all
of the data is properly
copied.
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 7.
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off.
When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000
automatically calls up the first disk song when
a disk is inserted.
This function copies all the data
from one disk to another, letting you
back up all your important data
before editing. For instructions, see
“Copying from Disk to Disk” below.
This function formats a
floppy disk (see below).
Source
disk
Copy Copy
Destination
disk
Internal memory
Copying from Disk to Disk
As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-A1000, then
copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.
1
Press the [F] button. A message
appears, prompting you to insert
the source disk.
2
Insert the disk containing the
original data into the drive and
press “OK.”
A “Now copying” message
appears, and the PSR-A1000
begins copying data to internal
memory. To abort the operation,
press “CANCEL.”
3
At the “Please insert a destination
disk and press the OK button ”
prompt, eject the source disk and
replace it with a blank, formatted
disk, then press “OK.” To abort the
operation, press “CANCEL.”
4
When the operation is finished
(or when prompted), eject the
destination disk.
Commercially available
music data is subject to
protection by copyright
laws. Copying commer-
cially available data is
strictly prohibited,
except for your own per-
sonal use. Some music
software is purposely
copy-protected and
cannot be copied.
Formatting a Disk
When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly
format it on the PSR-A1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks
already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the
disk.
Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To
start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the
DISK page above.
The Format operation initializes a disk
with a specific file system, allowing the
corresponding device (in this case, the
PSR-A1000) to access it properly.
Since there are several types of for-
mats and disks available, you should
know which ones to use with the PSR-
A1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a
capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are
formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.
Formatting a disk completely erases all
data on the disk. Make sure that the
disk you’re formatting does not contain
important data!
CAUTION
Disk Lamp
When the power is turned
on, the disk lamp (at the
bottom left of the drive)
lights to indicate the drive
can be used.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
135
PSR-A1000
Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 —
System Reset
This operation lets you restore the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI
Setup, User Effect, and Files & Folders.
I
F
J
G
H
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
Press this button to enter an Owner
name (for instructions on naming see
page 42). This name is automatically
shown when you turn the power on.
Determines the language used for the
display messages. Once you change
this setting, all messages will be
shown in the selected language.
I
F
J
G
H
D
A
E
B
C
81 2 3 4 5 6 7
These call up the corresponding Open/
Save displays. These let you store the
corresponding data as files for future
recall. From the PRESET page, you can
also recall the respective factory settings.
Restores the System Setup parameters to the
original factory settings. You can also restore
only the System Setup settings by
simultaneously holding down the highest key
on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power.
Restores the MIDI
templates to the original
factory settings.
Restores the User Effects
(page 116) to the original
factory settings.
Deletes all files and folders
stored in the User page.
Executes the Factory Reset operation
for all items checkmarked above.
The functions and settings
below do not apply to the
Factory Reset operation.
However, you can restore
these to their original set-
tings by calling up the preset
System Setup files from the
PRESET page in the SYS-
TEM SETUP Open/Save
display.
Language
Owner Name
LCD Brightness
PSR-A1000
136
Using Your
PSR-A1000
with Other Devices
1 Using the Headphones
(PHONES jack).
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in
here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal
stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a
pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack
(page 133).
2 Playing the sounds of the
PSR-A1000 through an
external audio system, and
recording the sounds to an
external recorder (AUX OUT/
OUTPUT jacks)
You can connect the PSR-A1000 to a wide range of audio
equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks.
Connect as shown in the illustrations below using
standard audio cables.
Before connecting the PSR-A1000 to other electronic components,
turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power
on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0).
Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
CAUTION
1
LR
AUX OUT
(LEVEL FIXED)
MIDI
HOST SELECT
FOOT PEDAL
OUT
2
IN
MIDI
PC2PC1
Mac
TO HOST
DC IN 16V
R L/L+R
OUTPUT
2
5
3
4
P.136
P.138
P.137
P.137
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.
When the PSR-A1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are
connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to
the PSR-A1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
CAUTION
LR R L/L+R
AUX OUT
(LEVEL FIXED)
OUTPUT
Audio cable
To powered speaker
RCA pin
plug
RCA pin plug
AUX IN
Cassette tape recorder
stereo system
Phone plug
(standard)
When these are connected
(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL
FIXED), the sound is output to
the external device at a fixed
level, regardless of the
[MASTER VOLUME] control
setting.
When these are connected
(with standard phone
plugs), you can use the
[MASTER VOLUME]
control to adjust the volume
of the sound output to the
external device.
• If you connect the PSR-A1000 to a monaural device, use only
the OUTPUT L/L+R jack.
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
137
PSR-A1000
3 Using the Pedal (footswitch)
or Foot Controller (FOOT
PEDAL 1/2 jack)
By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of
the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of
some panel buttons, doing things like starting and
stopping accompaniment.
By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the
FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one
of a variety of important functions with your foot — such
as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play
(page 123).
4 Connecting external MIDI
devices (MIDI terminals)
Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI
device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PSR-A1000. Make
sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI
when you use these connectors. For more information
about connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on
page 142.
MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an
external MIDI device
MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by
the PSR-A1000
For a general overview of MIDI and how you can
effectively use it, refer to the following sections:
• What’s MIDI? (page 139)
• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 142)
• MIDI functions (page 129)
The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be
changed (page 123).
Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power
is turned off.
CAUTION
• Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
PSR-A1000
138
5 Connecting to a Computer
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST
terminal)
Connect your PSR-A1000 to computer and take
advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile
software for creating and editing music. The PSR-A1000
can be connected in three ways.
■ Using the TO HOST terminal
■ Using the MIDI terminals
■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional
USB interface (UX series)
Using the TO HOST terminal
Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-
232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST
terminal of the PSR-A1000. For the connection cable, use
the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that
matches the personal computer type.
■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows)
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the
TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial
cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the
PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data
transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)
■ Macintosh
Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the
computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000
using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set
the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC”
(Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps).
Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are
using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the particular software you are using.
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI
driver)
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the
PSR-A1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a
specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for
Windows). The Floppy Disk that came with your PSR-
A1000 contains the compressed driver file
“mididrv.zip.” After extracting the file, execute the
installation by double-clicking on the “Setup.exe” file
in the “MidiDrv” folder and follow the on-screen
directions. In addition, you can download this driver
from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
• Yo u ’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such
as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform.
• When connecting the PSR-A1000 to a personal computer, first turn
off the power to both the PSR-A1000 and the computer before
connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After
making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of
the computer first, then that of the PSR-A1000.
• If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000, make
sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left
connected, the PSR-A1000 may not function properly.
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or
“Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connec-
tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI con-
nectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is
set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO
HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST ter-
minal.
If your system does not work properly with the connections and
settings listed above, your software may require different settings.
Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT
switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1”
is 31,250 bps.)
NEC
PC-9821
AS
NEC MultiSync
MINI DIN
8-pin
D-sub
9-pin
MINI DIN
8-pin
D-sub
25-pin
D-sub
9-pin
PC-1 PC-2
MIDIMac
* When using a D-SUB 25P
→ MINI DIN 8P cross
cable, connect using a D-
SUB9P plug adaptor on
the computer side of the
cable.
MINI DIN
8-pin
MINI DIN
8-pin
PC-1 PC-2
MIDIMac
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
139
PSR-A1000
Using the MIDI terminals
When using a MIDI interface device installed in the
personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the
personal computer and the PSR-A1000 with standard
MIDI cables.
• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,
connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal
computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST
SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series
computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the
computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI
interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the
MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-
A1000, as shown in the diagram below.
Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the
TO HOST terminal is disabled.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the
MIDI interface clock setting in the application
software to match the setting of the MIDI interface
you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the particular software you are using.
Using the USB terminal on your computer
with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96,
etc.)
Connect the UX256/UX96 and the computer with a USB
cable. Install the included UX256/UX96 driver to the
computer, and connect the UX256/UX96 to the PSR-
A1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch
on the PSR-A1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the
owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96.
For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer
and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant
owner’s manuals.
What’s MIDI?
Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as
representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you
strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string
and the note sounds.
But how does a digital instrument go about playing a
note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic
instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)
stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard,
and output through the speakers.
NEC
PC-9821
AS
NEC MultiSync
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
PC-1 PC-2
MIDIMac
MIDI IN
RS422
MIDI OUT
MINI DIN
8-pin
PC-1 PC-2
MIDIMac
Personal computer
MIDI IN
USB
cable
MIDI OUT
UX256
NEC
PC-9821
AS
NEC MultiSync
PC-1 PC-2
MIDIMac
IN OUT
MIDI
Internal ampInternal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing
the keyboard
RL
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
Based on playing information
from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the
tone generator is played
through the speakers.
Acoustic guitar note
production
Digital instrument note
production
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
PSR-A1000
140
Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a
recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,
a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound
(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called
audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.
In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the
pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as
audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play
back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the
actual piano performance. The piano itself is not
necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds
of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.
The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration
above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic
example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard
is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In
order to record the audio performance on an acoustic
piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,
since the PSR-A1000 features a built-in sequencer that
lets you record performance data, this recording
equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument
— the PSR-A1000 — allows you to both record and play
back the data.
However, we also need a sound source to produce the
audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The
tone generator of the PSR-A1000 fills this function. The
recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,
playing back the song data, using a tone generator
capable of accurately producing various instrument
sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another
way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator
is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays
the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data
and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our
piano performance played by another instrument, such as
guitar or violin.
Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets
recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the
sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
using the grand piano sound on the PSR-A1000 keyboard.
Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated
note, the electronic instrument puts out information from
the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which
key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and
“when was it released.” Then each piece of information is
changed into a number value and sent to the tone
generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone
generator plays the stored sampled note.
Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic
instrument (audio data)
Recording Playback
FD
Tone generator
Sequencer
FD
Recording and playing back the performance of a digital
instrument (MIDI data)
Controller (keyboard, etc.)
Recording Playback
In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent
through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.
Tone generator
Sequencer
Keyboard performance
(MIDI data)
Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-A1000 can
be thought of as containing several electronic components: a con-
troller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
141
PSR-A1000
■ Example Keyboard Data
Panel operations on the PSR-A1000, such as playing the
keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored
as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs
also consist of MIDI data.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument
Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other, by sending
and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program
Change and various other types of MIDI data, or
messages.
The PSR-A1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting
note related data and various types of controller data.The
PSR-A1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI
messages which automatically determine the tone
generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects,
change parameter values and of course play the voices
specified for the various parts.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel
messages and System messages.
■ Channel Messages
The PSR-A1000 is an electronic instrument that can
handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO
HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play
16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages
transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program
Change, for each of the 16 channels.
MIDI channels
MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen
MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the
performance data for sixteen different instrument parts
can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV
station transmits its broadcasts over a specific
channel.Your home TV set receives many different
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and
you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired
program.
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The
transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific
MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single
MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving
instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)
matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument
will sound according to the data sent by the
transmitting instrument.
For example, several tracks (channels) can be
transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as
shown below).
Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-A1000 to
an external sequencer
Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed)
and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically
(quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the
keyboard is played. Each message includes
a specific note number which corresponds
to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity
value based on how hard the key is played.
Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select
MSB/LSB setting)
Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.
MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:
• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI
songs to floppy disk.
• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of
changing voices and transforming the data.
The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI
data.
1
Weather Report
News
2
2
News
MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2
MIDI
cable
The PSR-A1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also
connected by MIDI (page 129).
MIDI cable or
serial cable
PSR-A1000 track (channnel)
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
External sequencer
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
PSR-A1000
142
As you can see, it is essential to determine which data
is to be sent over which MIDI channel when
transmitting MIDI data (page 130). The PSR-A1000 also
allows you to determine how the received data is
played back. (page 131).
■ System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI
system. System messages include messages like Exclusive
Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument
manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the
MIDI device.
The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-A1000 are
shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI
Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.
What You Can Do With MIDI
The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR-
A1000:
• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various
applications) (page 129)
• Transmit (page 130)
• Receive (page 131)
• Local Control (page 129)
• Clock (page 130)
■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the
PSR-A1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a
external sequencer (such as a personal computer).
After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then
play it again on the PSR-A1000 (playback).
When you want to use the PSR-A1000 as an XG-
compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive
part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI
Receive (page 131).
■ Play and control the PSR-A1000 from a separate
keyboard
Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data
compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can
playback the data recorded by PSR-A1000, and whether
or not the PSR-A1000 can playback commercially
available song data or song data created for other
instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI
device or data characteristics, you may be able to play
back the data without any problem, or you may have to
perform some special operations before the data can be
played back. If you run into problems playing back data,
please refer to the information below.
Disk format
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used
with various devices, including computers. Different
devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it
is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system
of the device being used.This operation is called
“formatting.”
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double
sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,
high density), and each type has different formatting
systems.
• PSR-A1000 can record and playback with both types
of floppy disks.
• When formatted by the PSR-A1000, a 2DD disk stores
up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up
to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and
“1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are
also used to indicate the format type of disk.)
• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be
used is compatible with the format of the disk.
Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting
System Exclusive
Message
Effect type settings (Mixing Console),
etc.
Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation
Personal cumputer,
QY series etc.
MIDI receive
MIDI transmit
NEC
PC-9821
AS
NEC MultiSync
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
PSR-A1000
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MIDI receive
PSR-A1000
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices
143
PSR-A1000
Sequence Format
The system which records song data is called “sequence
format.”
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of
the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-A1000
is compatible with the following formats.
■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are
compatible with Format 0, and most commercially
available software is recorded as Format 0.
• The PSR-A1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and
Format 1.
• Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 is automatically
recorded as SMF Format 0.
• Song data loaded to the PSR-A1000 is automatically
saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original
format.
■ ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-A1000 series
instruments.This is a common format used with various
Yamaha software.
■ XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI
File) format with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future.
• The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when
an XF file containing lyric data is played.
■ Style File
The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file
format which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types.
Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers,
called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice
allocation format.”
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice
allocation format of the song data matches that of the
compatible MIDI device used for playback.
The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats.
■ GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System
Level1, as is most commercially available software.
■ XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1
format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to
provide more voices and variations, as well as greater
expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure
compatibility of data well into the future.
• Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 using voices in
the [XG] category is XG-compatible.
■ DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series
instruments.This is also a common format used with
various Yamaha software.
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,
the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the
specifications of the devices and particular data recording
methods.
PSR-A1000
144
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
• The PSR-A1000 does not turn on; there is no
power.
Make sure that the PSR-A1000 has been plugged in properly (page 16).
• A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.
• Noise is heard from the PSR-A1000’s
speakers.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-A1000 may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from
the PSR-A1000.
• The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;
try adjusting the contrast (page 17).
• The keyboard volume is low compared to that
of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.
The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard
part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower
the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 58).
• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or
song playback is low compared to that of the
keyboard.
The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set
too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display
(page 113).
• The overall volume is low, or no sound is
heard.
• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the
[MASTER VOLUME] dial.
• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of
MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 58).
• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 58, 69).
• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the
headphones.
• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 129).
• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-A1000. When this
happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played
notes sound. See page 146 for information on the maximum polyphony.
• Accompaniment style or Song playback does
not start.
• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
(page 130).
• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an
accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 58); to
playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 67).
•“New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an
appropriate song in the SONG display (page 67).
• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the
beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 69).
• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when
one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.
MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
(page 130).
• Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP]
button.
• The accompaniment style does not start,
even when Synchro Start is in standby
condition and a key is pressed.
You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand
range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)
range of the keyboard.
• The desired chord is not recognized or output
by the auto accompaniment.
• You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord
Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 60).
• You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not
the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the
keys according to the selected mode (page 59).
• An unexpected result or malfunction occurred
during an operation.
If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more
buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or
unusual results may occur.
• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized
regardless of the split point or where chords
are played on the keyboard.
This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”
If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the
keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different
fingering mode (page 59).
Troubleshooting
145
PSR-A1000
• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”
changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as
the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 72).
• Some channels do not properly play back
when playing back song data.
Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 69).
• The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering
modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 59).
• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via
the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables
are connected properly.
Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 139). The MIDI
terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.
• When a voice is changed, the previously
selected effect is changed.
Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled
when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 127).
• There is a slight difference in sound quality
between notes played on the keyboard.
• Some voices have a looping sound.
• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher
pitches, depending upon the voice.
This is normal and is a result of the PSR-A1000’s sampling system.
• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch
when played in the upper or lower registers.
This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this
type of pitch shift.
• Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1
megabyte of data to a floppy disk.
• The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or
Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display
(page 114).
• The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings
are appropriate.
• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,
especially distortion-type effects (page 115).
• Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 81)
can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.
• A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound
occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different
each time the keys are played.
Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the
same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 53) or change the voice for each
part (page 51).
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
PSR-A1000
146
Specifications
: available
Model Name PSR-A1000
Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD
Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch)
Voice Polyphony (max) 32
Number of Voices 276 regular voices + 480 XG voices + 20 Drum Kits
Number of Oriental Voices 43
Number of Oriental Drum Kits 6
Number of Sweet Voices 3
Number of Cool Voices 1
Sound creator
Effects
Effect Blocks
Reverb 1
Chorus 1
DSP 1
Effect Types
REVERB 23 Preset+3 User
CHORUS 15 Preset+3 User
DSP 93 Preset+3 User
Accompaniment
Style
Number of Accompaniment Styles 190
Number of Oriental Styles 123
Number of Session Styles 4
Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,
Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard
Style Creator
Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ
Preset Songs
Lyrics
Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing
Record Channels 16
Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks
Memory
Device
Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)
Flash Memory (internal) 260KB
Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.
Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500
Tap Tempo
Metronome
Sound Bell on/off
Specifications
147
PSR-A1000
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to
change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not
be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Thanks
YAMAHA Corporation wishes to express our thanks to:
Mr. Mohammed Saleh (Lebanon)
Mr. Sairos Isa (Bahrain)
Mr. Wadea Al Kandari (Kuwait)
Mr. Fawaz Al Kandari (Kuwait)
Mr. Arash Adelpour (Iran)
Mr. Dimitris Vassiliou (Greece)
Mr. Ahmet Can Basar (Turkey)
Mr. Mehmet Dogdu (Turkey)
for composing Styles/Demos and their cooperation.
Scale Scale Tuning
Scale Memory buttons 6
Scale Template Equal Temperament, Bayat, Rast, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Pythagorean,
Mean-Tone, Werckmeister, Kirnberger
Registration
Memory
Buttons 8
Regist Sequence
Freeze
Others Demo Function, Voice, Style
Language 3 languages (English, German, French)
Help
Direct Access
Master Volume
Fade In/Out
Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master
Tuning
Touch Response 5 level
Jacks/Connectors DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), TO HOST,
HOST SELECT SW, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2,
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R)
Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,
PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP,
STYLE START/STOP, etc.
Amplifiers/
Speakers
Amplifiers 12 W ✕ 2
Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2
Power Consumption 31 W
Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included)
*May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]
(without Music Stand)
973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm
[38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"]
Weight 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz)
Optional
accessories
Headphones HPE-150
Foot Switch FC4 / FC5
Foot Controller FC7
Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7
Model Name PSR-A1000
PSR-A1000
148
Index
Numerics
1 - 16 ............................................................................. 87, 96
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 35–42
A
A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 122
[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 37
Accent Type ....................................................................... 105
Accessories ............................................................................ 6
Accompaniment style parts................................................... 85
[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 57
ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 122
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 112
Adjusting the display contrast............................................... 17
Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 115
Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......................... 72
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 47
Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 58
Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels... 69
Adjusting values ................................................................... 43
AI ......................................................................................... 59
AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 59
AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 59
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 122
Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 54
Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 61
Assembling an Accompaniment Style................................. 103
ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 82
ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 81
AUTO .................................................................................. 20
AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 121
[AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 63
Auto Revoice...................................................................... 113
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 136
B
[BACK] button.......................................................... 19, 37, 43
BALANCE............................................................................. 58
[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 58
Bar Clear ............................................................................ 106
Bar Copy ............................................................................ 106
base note.............................................................................. 72
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 35
Bass...................................................................................... 85
Bayat.................................................................................... 73
Beat Converter.................................................................... 104
Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 105
[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 61
BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 81
C
Cent ..................................................................................... 72
Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 104
Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 114
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 127
Changing the Icon ................................................................ 43
Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 114
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 125
Channel ................................................... 58, 69, 93, 106, 121
Channel Messages.............................................................. 141
Channel Muting ................................................................... 58
CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................58, 69
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 58, 69
Channel Transpose ...............................................................95
CHD.....................................................................................97
Chord ...................................................................................85
Chord Detect ......................................................................131
Chord Events.........................................................................97
Chord Fingering............................................................59, 123
CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................82
Chord Tutor ........................................................................123
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode....................60
Chorus................................................................................117
CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................82
Clock..................................................................................130
COMMON ...........................................................................80
COMPARE............................................................................79
Compatible Song Types ........................................................66
CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................132
CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................133
Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................137
Connecting to a Computer..................................................138
Controller ...........................................................................123
Cool! ....................................................................................52
COPY ...................................................................................40
Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................134
Copying Files/Folders............................................................40
Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................134
Creating Accompaniment Styles............................................99
Current Memory ...................................................................36
Customizing the Event List — Filter.......................................98
CUT......................................................................................39
D
Data Compatibility..............................................................142
[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 43
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........130
DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 136
DECAY .................................................................................81
DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................40
Delete (Song Creator)............................................................94
Deleting Files/Folders............................................................40
[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 49
DEPTH..................................................................................82
DESTINATION......................................................................94
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button..........................14, 18, 83, 99
[DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................19, 44
Direct Access Chart ..............................................................45
Disk....................................................................................134
Disk format.........................................................................142
Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................17
DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER .................................................133
Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................71
Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................41
DOC...................................................................................143
Drum....................................................................................52
[DSP] button...........................................................19, 54, 117
DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator).................................................82
Dynamics ...........................................................................105
E
ECHO...........................................................................55, 127
Edit .....................................................................................102
Index
149
PSR-A1000
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style............................... 104
Editing a Recorded Song....................................................... 93
Editing Channel-related Parameters ...................................... 93
Editing Chord Events ............................................................ 97
Editing Note Events .............................................................. 96
Editing System Events ........................................................... 97
Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 106
Editing Voices ...................................................................... 79
EFFECT................................................................................. 82
Effect Block ........................................................................ 116
Effect Connections.............................................................. 117
Effect Structure ................................................................... 117
Effects................................................................................. 115
EG........................................................................................ 81
EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 81
EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 81
EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 81
Embellish and enhance your melodies
— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29
END Mark ............................................................................ 91
ENDING .............................................................................. 63
[ENDING / rit.] button.............................................. 18, 30, 62
[ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 43
Entering Characters............................................................... 42
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 90
Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)............................ 42
Entering numbers ................................................................. 42
Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)................. 42
Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 135
Equal Temperament.............................................................. 73
ESEQ .................................................................................. 143
Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 141
[EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 37
exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 37
Expand/Compress............................................................... 105
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.................................... 18, 70
F
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 132
[FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 62
[FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 69
File....................................................................................... 36
File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 38
Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 39
Fill........................................................................................ 63
Filter....................................................................... 81, 98, 114
FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator)........................................... 81
FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81
Fine.................................................................................... 104
FINGERED ........................................................................... 59
FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 59
First Key On ......................................................................... 92
FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 36
FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN.................................... 134
Floppy disk drive.............................................................. 19, 7
FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ....................................................... 137
[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack................................. 19, 137
[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack .................................................. 19, 137
Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 134
[FREEZE] button.............................................................. 19, 78
Freeze .......................................................................... 78, 126
FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 59
[FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 118
G
Gate Time ............................................................................ 88
GM System Level 1.......................................................17, 143
Groove ...............................................................................104
Groove parameters .............................................................104
GROUP SELECT....................................................................76
H
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7
Harmonic Content ................................................................81
HARMONY ............................................................55, 82, 127
Harmony Assignments ........................................................128
Harmony Types ..................................................................128
[HARMONY / ECHO] button..........................................19, 55
Headphones .......................................................................136
Help messages can be displayed in any one
of the following languages.................................................46
[HELP] button .................................................................18, 46
High Key.............................................................................108
[HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 137
Hz ......................................................................................120
I
ICON....................................................................................43
ICON SELECT .......................................................................43
Inputting and Editing Lyrics...................................................98
Instant Selection of Displays .................................................44
INTRO..................................................................................63
[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 61
K
Kbd.Vel.................................................................................88
Keyboard Percussion.............................................................52
Keyboard Touch .................................................................125
Keyboard/Panel...................................................................125
Kirnberger.............................................................................73
L
L (LEFT)...............................................................................122
Layer.....................................................................................53
Layering Two Different Voices..............................................53
LCD......................................................................................15
[LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................19, 17
Left .......................................................................................54
[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................19, 55
Local Control......................................................................129
Loop recording .....................................................................99
Lyrics..............................................................................71, 98
M
MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................61
MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 61
MAIN [B] button.............................................................18, 61
MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 61
MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 61
Maintaining Panel Settings..................................................126
Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................118
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)129
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap.................................................132
Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number
Indication........................................................................133
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard......................123
Making Style File Format Settings........................................107
Master Tune........................................................................120
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17
Mean-Tone ...........................................................................73
Index
PSR-A1000
150
Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 88
Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory ..................... 74
[MEMORY] button (REGISTRATION MEMORY)............. 19, 76
[MEMORY] button (SCALE MEMORY)............................ 18, 74
Message Switch.................................................................. 130
Messages................................................................................ 8
Metronome ........................................................................ 132
[METRONOME] button ........................................................ 18
MIDI .................................................................................. 129
MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals........................................... 19, 137
MIDI channels.................................................................... 141
MIDI IN.............................................................................. 137
MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 137
MIDI Receive Parts............................................................. 131
MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 135
MIDI terminals ........................................................... 137, 138
Mix ...................................................................................... 94
[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 112
[MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 55
MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80
Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 39
MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 59
MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons .......................................... 19, 64
Multi Pads ............................................................................ 15
Multi Recording ................................................................... 85
Music Stand ......................................................................... 17
Muting Specific Parts............................................................ 70
N
NAME ............................................................................ 38, 41
Naming Files and Folders ..................................................... 38
NEW (Folder) ....................................................................... 41
[NEXT] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43
Normal................................................................................. 92
Note Events .......................................................................... 96
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 138
Note Limit .......................................................................... 108
Nrm...................................................................................... 88
NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 107
NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 108
O
OCTAVE ............................................................................ 114
OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator)............................................. 80
OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator).......................................... 80
Open/Save displays .............................................................. 35
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 41
Oriental Scales ..................................................................... 72
Original Beat...................................................................... 104
Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 102
Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 69
Other Settings..................................................................... 132
OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ......................................... 19, 136
Overdub recording............................................................... 99
Owner................................................................................ 135
P
Pad....................................................................................... 85
PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator)......................................... 82
Parameter........................................................................... 107
Parameter Lock................................................................... 133
PASTE ............................................................................ 39, 40
Pedal.................................................................................. 123
PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY ........................................................ 123
PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT ...................................................... 92
Pedal-controllable Functions .............................................. 124
[PHONES] jack.............................................................18, 136
Phrase...................................................................................85
Phrase Mark..................................................................69, 121
PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................121
PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 55
PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................114
Pitch settings for each scale ..................................................73
Playback of Songs.................................................................21
Playing a style.................................................................28, 56
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................58
Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 .......................................32
Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................................69
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections ...................................................63
Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................53
Playing Styles........................................................................28
Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 49
Playing the Internal Songs.....................................................67
Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through
an external audio system, and recording the sounds to
an external recorder ........................................................136
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26
Playing Voices ......................................................................25
Playing with the Songs..........................................................32
PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) .....................................80
PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console) ..............................114
Power Supply........................................................................16
Powering Up.........................................................................17
Power-on Procedure .............................................................16
PRESET drive.........................................................................36
Preset MIDI Templates........................................................129
Punch In/Out ........................................................................92
Pure Major............................................................................73
Pure Minor............................................................................73
Pythagorean..........................................................................73
Q
Quantize.......................................................................93, 106
Quantize Size .......................................................................93
Quick Recording...................................................................84
QUICK START ....................................................................121
Quick Start..........................................................................121
R
Rast.......................................................................................73
Realtime Recording.............................................................101
Realtime Recording Characteristics.......................................99
[REC] button ...................................................................18, 83
REC END ..............................................................................92
Rec Mode .............................................................................92
REC START ...........................................................................92
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup.................................78
Recalling the Registered Settings...........................................78
Recalling the Scale Setting ....................................................75
Receive...............................................................................131
Receive Transpose ..............................................................130
Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................131
Recording .............................................................................33
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......90
Recording Individual Notes...................................................87
Recording Melodies..............................................................89
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................83
Registering Panel Setups .......................................................76
REGISTRATION EDIT display ...............................................77
Registration Memory.............................................................76
Index
151
PSR-A1000
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons................... 19, 76
REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 76
Registration Sequence ........................................................ 126
RELEASE............................................................................... 81
Remove Event .................................................................... 106
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 70
[REPEAT] button............................................................. 18, 70
Resonance............................................................................ 81
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PSR-A1000............................................................ 135
Reverb................................................................................ 117
REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator) .......................................... 82
[REW] button ................................................................. 18, 69
Rhythm ................................................................................ 85
Root ................................................................................... 131
RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 108
S
S.STOP WINDOW ............................................................. 122
SAVE .................................................................................... 41
Save ............................................................................... 35, 41
Saving Files .......................................................................... 41
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 77
Saving Your Scale Settings.................................................... 74
Scale .................................................................................... 73
Scale Memory ...................................................................... 74
[SCALE MEMORY] button .................................................... 75
SCALE MEMORY button....................................................... 74
Scale Setting......................................................................... 72
[SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................... 72
SCALE TUNE BANK display ................................................. 75
SCALE TUNE display............................................................ 72
SCALE TUNE EDIT display ................................................... 75
Scale Tuning ........................................................................ 72
[SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... 72
Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons ...........61
SECTION SET ..................................................................... 122
sections ................................................................................ 30
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out ............................................................... 92
Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 51
Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 37
Selecting Intro and Ending Types.......................................... 63
Selecting items ..................................................................... 43
Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 78
SEQUENCE END................................................................ 126
Sequence Format................................................................ 143
sequencer........................................................................... 140
Set Up .................................................................................. 95
Setting an Oriental Scale ...................................................... 34
Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ............................. 72
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 122
Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 131
Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 127
Setting Root Note Channels................................................ 131
Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections
of the Keyboard ................................................................ 54
Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 121
Setting the Fingering Method.............................................. 123
Setting the Level Balance and Voice................................... 113
Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 129
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 126
Setting the volume................................................................ 17
SFX....................................................................................... 52
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ..
68
SINGLE FINGER....................................................................59
SMF (Standard MIDI File)....................................................143
Song ...............................................................................14, 66
SONG [START / STOP] button........................................18, 67
SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................113
SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................121
Song Creator.........................................................................83
Song Playback ..........................................................21, 66, 67
Song Recording.....................................................................83
Song Settings.......................................................................121
SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................81
Sound Creator Parameters.....................................................80
[SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 79
Source Root/Chord..............................................................107
SOURCE1.............................................................................94
SOURCE2.............................................................................94
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory
Presets.............................................................................126
SPEED...................................................................................82
SPEED (HARMONY) .............................................................82
Split Point ...........................................................................122
[STANDBY/ON] switch.............................................14, 18, 17
Step Record ..........................................................................87
Step Record (Chord)..............................................................90
Step Record (Note)................................................................89
Step Recording....................................................................102
STOP ACMP .......................................................................122
[STOP] button (MULTI PAD)...........................................19, 64
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................62
Strength ..............................................................................105
Style................................................................................14, 56
STYLE [START / STOP] button.........................................18, 57
STYLE buttons.................................................................18, 56
Style Creator .........................................................................99
Style File.......................................................................17, 143
Style File Format .................................................................100
Style Sections........................................................................30
Style Setting ........................................................................122
sustain ............................................................................81, 82
[SUSUTAIN] button ........................................................19, 54
Sweet!...................................................................................52
Swing..................................................................................104
[SYNC.START] button.....................................................18, 57
[SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 62
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)....................................................97
System ................................................................................129
System and Insertion...........................................................117
System Events .......................................................................97
System Messages.................................................................142
System Reset.......................................................................135
SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................135
T
Tap Count...........................................................................133
[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................19, 48
TEMPO [
E] [ ] buttons..............................................19, 47
Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................48
[TO HOST] terminal ...............................................15, 19, 138
TO HOST terminal..............................................................138
[TOP] button...................................................................18, 69
TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................82
TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator)............................................80
[TOUCH] button.............................................................19, 54
[TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 70
[TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 70
Transmit..............................................................................130
Transmit Clock....................................................................130
E
Index
PSR-A1000
152
Transmitting MIDI Data...................................................... 130
TRANSPOSE [
E] [ ] buttons.................................... 19, 125
Transpose Assign................................................................ 125
Tune................................................................................... 114
TUNING ............................................................................ 114
Tuning the Overall Pitch .................................................... 120
TYPE (HARMONY)............................................................... 82
U
[UPPER OCTAVE] button ............................................... 19, 55
USER drive ........................................................................... 36
USER EFFECT (Function)..................................................... 135
User Effect (Mixing Console) .............................................. 116
Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/
Scale Memory................................................................... 72
Using the USB terminal on your computer
with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.)......................... 139
Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ....................... 136
Utility................................................................................. 132
V
[VARIATION] button...................................................... 19, 55
Velocity........................................................................ 88, 105
Velocity Change................................................................. 106
VIBRATO ............................................................................. 82
VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator) ........................................ 81
VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator)........................................ 81
VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator)......................................... 81
Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 143
VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 51
Voice Characteristics............................................................ 52
Voice Effects......................................................................... 54
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 19, 53
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 19, 53
VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button .......................... 19, 53
Voice Set............................................................................ 127
VOLUME (HARMONY)........................................................ 82
VOLUME (Sound Creator) .................................................... 80
Volume/Voice .................................................................... 113
W
Werckmeister ....................................................................... 73
What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 142
What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 139
X
XF ................................................................................ 17, 143
XG ............................................................................... 17, 143
E
153
PSR-A1000
MEMO
PSR-A1000
154
(standby)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som
den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har
stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá
selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
155
PSR-A1000
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-3273
[PK] 22 (PSR-A1000)
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panamá S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Claviers
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria
3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2002 Yamaha Corporation
??????? ???AP???.?-01A0
Printed in Indonesia
Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)
http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
Transcripción de documentos
OWNER’S OWNER’S MANUAL MANUAL Before using the PSR-A1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom) 2 PSR-A1000 Introduction PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The • • • required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in • damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, • • always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or • • • • (3)-7 extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. 1/2 PSR-A1000 3 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Saving and backing up your data • Current memory data (see page 36) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User Drive (see page 36). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk. Maintenance When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution Backing up the floppy disk • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the • • • • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. (3)-7 4 PSR-A1000 2/2 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-A1000! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PSR-A1000. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. PSR-A1000 5 Accessories ■ PA-300 AC Adaptor* ■ Floppy Disk [includes style files, song files and MIDI Driver (page 138)] ■ Music Stand (page 17) ■ Data List ■ Owner’s Manual * May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference. Also, a separate Data List is provided. Introduction (page 3): Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 35): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls. Reference (page 49): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-A1000’s various functions. Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. For example, the voice or style name appearing in the LCD screens in this manual may differ from that of the actual instrument. * The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. * The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. * Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. 6 PSR-A1000 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. • Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the floppy disk. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data is not being written to the floppy disk. If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in the following operations, the messages “Now executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting” appears in the display. • Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data (page 39 - 41). • Naming files and folders (page 38); creating a new folder (page 41). • Copying a disk to an another disk (page 134); formatting the disk (page 134). • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Eject button PSR-A1000 7 About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). write-protect tab open (protect position) Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 134. About the Display Messages A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button. F G H I J For this example, press the [G] (YES) button to execute formatting. 8 PSR-A1000 You can select the desired language from the Help display (page 46). Table of Contents Introduction ............................ 3 Reference PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Accessories ............................................................... 6 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7 About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Application Index ................................................... 12 What can you do with the PSR-A1000? ................. 14 Setting Up the PSR-A1000 ..................................... 16 Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18 Playing the Demos .................49 Quick Guide ........................... 20 Playing the Demos ................................................. 20 Song Playback ........................................................ 21 Playback of Songs ....................................................21 Playing Voices ........................................................ 25 Playing a Voice ........................................................25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands..........................................................27 Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 Playing a style ..........................................................28 Style Sections...........................................................30 Playing with the Songs .......................................... 32 Playing Along with the PSR-A1000...........................32 Recording ................................................................33 Setting an Oriental Scale ....................................... 34 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ....... 35 Example — Open/Save display for Voice..................36 Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 37 File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 38 Naming Files/Folders ...............................................38 Moving Files/Folders ................................................39 Copying Files/Folders...............................................40 Deleting Files/Folders...............................................40 Saving Files ..............................................................41 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............41 Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................41 Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................41 Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 43 Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 44 Help Messages ....................................................... 46 Using the Metronome............................................ 47 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 47 Voices.....................................51 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 51 Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously .................................................... 53 Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 53 Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ............................ 54 Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 54 PITCH BEND Wheel ................................................ 55 Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 55 Styles......................................56 Playing a style ........................................................ 56 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 58 Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 58 Chord Fingerings.................................................... 59 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/ B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)..................................61 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 62 Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 63 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 63 The Multi Pads .......................64 Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 64 Chord Match .......................................................... 64 Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 65 Song Playback........................66 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 66 Song Playback ........................................................ 67 Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 67 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................... 69 Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 69 Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks ............................ 70 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 70 Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 71 Tap Tempo ..............................................................48 PSR-A1000 9 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/ Scale Memory ........................ 72 Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting............. 72 Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......... 72 Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory .... 74 Saving Your Scale Settings .................................... 74 Recalling the Scale Setting .................................... 75 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory ........ 76 Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory...................................... 76 Step Recording..................................................... 102 Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly ........................................................ 103 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 104 Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics ................................... 104 Editing the Channel Data ...................................... 106 Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 107 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator ............109 Operation ............................................................. 109 Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 110 Start recording...................................................... 110 Stop recording...................................................... 110 Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 111 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................77 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 78 Editing Voices — Sound Creator ................... 79 Operation ............................................................... 79 Sound Creator Parameters .................................... 80 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator ..................... 83 About Song Recording........................................... 83 Quick Recording..................................................... 84 Multi Recording ..................................................... 85 Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 87 Operation ................................................................87 Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............89 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) ..............90 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode........... 92 Editing a Recorded Song ....................................... 93 Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .......93 Editing Note Events — 1 - 16...................................96 Editing Chord Events — CHD...................................97 Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ..97 Inputting and Editing Lyrics .....................................98 Customizing the Event List — Filter..........................98 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ..................... 99 About Creating Accompaniment Styles ................ 99 Style File Format .................................................. 100 Operation ............................................................. 100 Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 101 10 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console ................112 Operation ............................................................. 112 Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice ............................................... 113 Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 114 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 114 Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 115 Effect Structure ..................................................... 117 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function...........................118 Operation ............................................................. 118 Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune................. 120 Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 120 Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings................................................ 121 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering......................................... 122 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 122 Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering ............................................ 123 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller...................................................... 123 Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 123 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel ............................................. 125 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set..................................................... 126 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 126 Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................126 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set...........................................127 Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 127 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 129 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................129 Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................130 Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................131 Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................131 Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............131 Introduction Quick Guide Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 132 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............132 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2......................................133 Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................134 Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner............................................................135 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset ......................135 Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data Playing the Demos Voices Styles Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices.............. 136 Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). ..................136 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) ..................................136 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................137 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) .................................................137 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................138 What’s MIDI? .........................................................139 What You Can Do With MIDI .................................142 Data Compatibility.................................................142 Disk format ............................................................142 Sequence Format...................................................143 Voice Allocation Format .........................................143 Troubleshooting.................. 144 Specifications ...................... 146 Index ................................... 148 The Multi Pad Song Playback Using Oriental Scales - Scale Setting/ Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups - Registration Memory Editing Voices - Sound Creator Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs - Song Creator Creating Accompaniment Styles - Style Creator Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices - Mixing Console Making Global and Other Important Settings - Function Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Appendix PSR-A1000 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation. Listening Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 67 Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 69 Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 49 Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 51 Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-A1000 ................................................................ page 113 Playing Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 125 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54 Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 54 .................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 115 Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 113 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 53 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 54 Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79 Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 56 Practicing Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 47 Recording Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 84, 85 Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 87 Creating your original settings Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 79 Creating accompaniment styles.............................................................................................................. page 99 Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 109 12 PSR-A1000 Application Index Settings Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 76 Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 120 Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 121 Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 122 Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 125 Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 129 Connecting the PSR-A1000 to other devices Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 139 Recording your performance.............. ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136 Raising the volume ............................ ”Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 136 Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 138 Quick solution Basic functions of the PSR-A1000 and how you can best use it.......................................................pages 12, 14 Resetting the PSR-A1000 to the default setting ........................“Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset” on page 135 Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 144 PSR-A1000 13 What can you do with the PSR-A1000? SONG Playback previously recorded songs (page 21, 32, 66) Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks. 14 SCALE SETTING/ SCALE MEMORY DEMO The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. Explore the Demos (page 20, 49) These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features — and give you hands-on experience using the PSR-A1000! STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 28, 56) Record your performances (page 83, 99) Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PSR-A1000 be your backing band! With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions — which you can then save to the USER drive or a floppy disk for future recall. PSR-A1000 LCD SCALE TUNING VOICE The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control of the PSR-A1000’s operations. You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes. Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 25, 51) TO HOST terminal Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 138) Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds — all from a single PSRA1000! The PSR-A1000 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices — including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more! Multi Pads Add spice to your performance with special dynamic phrases (page 64, 109) By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard. PSR-A1000 15 Setting Up the PSR-A1000 Power Supply Power-on Procedure sure that the PSR-A1000’s STANDBY/ON 1 Make switch is at the STANDBY (off) position. 2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300. the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-A1000’s 3 Connect DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear panel. When you have made all the necessary connections (page 136) between your PSR-A1000 and any other devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI operation and prevents speaker damage. When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio device, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI). MIDI master (transmitting device) POWER ON!! DC IN To electrical outlet PSR-A1000 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device) the other end (normal AC plug) to the 4 Connect nearest electrical outlet. WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSRA1000, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-A1000 IS NOT IN USE. CAUTION Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-A1000 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. 16 PSR-A1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L R Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier) Powering Up Music Stand CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the PSR-A1000 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the PSR-A1000 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the "STANDBY" position,electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-A1000 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. The PSR-A1000 is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. n Before you switch your PSR-A1000 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment. 1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch. → The main display appears in the display. GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. STANDBY ON BACK NEXT MAIN A F B G C H The Panel Logos The logos printed on the PSR-A1000 panel indicate standards/ formats it supports and special features it includes. XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the PSR-A1000 XG voices, it is possible to record XGcompatible song files. LAYER D I E J LEFT When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again. → Both the display and the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) will turn off. 2 Adjusting the display contrast If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST] knob on the rear panel. 3 Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. LCD CONTRAST XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices. Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The PSR-A1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature. MASTER VOLUME MIN MAX PSR-A1000 17 Panel Controls and Terminals 5 6 7 10 9 73 72 71 51 4 8 38 32 11 12 13 33 14 34 35 36 15 37 18 16 40 17 39 41 42 19 21 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 C1 CLICK 36 D1 T 37 E1 38 S 39 POWER 1 [STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17 WHEEL 2 PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 55 PHONES 3 [PHONES] jack................................................................... P. 136 METRONOME 4 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 47 SONG 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 70 [TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 70 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 70 [REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 70 [REC] button......................................................................... P. 83 [TOP] button......................................................................... P. 69 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 67 [REW] button........................................................................ P. 69 [FF] button............................................................................ P. 69 STYLE 14 STYLE buttons ..................................................................... P. 56 SCALE SETTING 15 [SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................. P. 72 SCALE MEMORY 16 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 74 17 [SCALE MEMORY] buttons ................................................. P. 74 18 PSR-A1000 F1 40 R 41 G1 42 L 43 A1 44 L 45 B1 46 M 47 C2 H 48 D2 49 M 50 E2 51 H 52 F2 G2 L 53 54 H 55 A2 56 L 57 B2 58 M 59 L C3 M 60 H D3 C 61 1 H 62 E3 R 63 1 F3 64 R 65 G3 66 S 67 MASTER VOLUME 18 [MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17 STYLE CONTROL 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 [ACMP] button ...................................................................... P. 57 [BREAK] button .................................................................... P. 61 [INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 63 MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [C] button.................................................................... P. 61 MAIN [D] button.................................................................... P. 61 [ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 63 [AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 63 [FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 62 [SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 62 [SYNC.START] button .......................................................... P. 57 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 57 DIGITAL STUDIO 32 [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 79 33 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button...................................... P. 83, 99 34 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 112 MENU 35 [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 49 36 [HELP] button....................................................................... P. 46 37 [FUNCTION] button............................................................ P. 118 74 75 77 76 78 43 44 53 54 55 56 57 58 52 38 59 45 46 70 47 61 60 64 66 65 48 49 50 62 63 69 67 68 A3 68 C 69 2 B3 70 R 71 2 C4 H 72 D4 L 73 E4 74 H 75 F4 L 76 H 77 G4 L 78 H 79 A4 L 80 B4 81 82 H 83 C5 L 84 D5 S 85 L 86 E5 87 H 88 F5 L 89 G5 M 90 O 91 A5 92 DISPLAY CONTROL 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 [A] - [J] buttons ..................................................................... P. 37 [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 44 [BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 58 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 58, 69 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons .................................................P. 35 - 42 [BACK] button ................................................................ P. 37, 43 [NEXT] button................................................................. P. 37, 43 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 53 [ENTER] button .................................................................... P. 43 [DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 43 [EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 37 [LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17 VOICE EFFECT 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 [LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 55 [TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 54 [SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 54 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 55 [MONO] button ..................................................................... P. 55 [DSP] button......................................................................... P. 54 [VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 55 VOICE 59 VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 51 TRANSPOSE 60 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 125 B5 93 94 C6 95 96 TEMPO 61 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 47 62 [TAP TEMPO] button ............................................................ P. 48 UPPER OCTAVE 63 [UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 55 SCALE TUNING 64 [SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... P. 72 MULTI PAD 65 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 64 66 [STOP] button....................................................................... P. 64 REGISTRATION MEMORY 67 [FREEZE] button .................................................................. P. 78 68 [1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 76 69 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 76 FLOPPY DISK 70 Floppy disk drive (3.5")........................................................... P. 7 Connectors 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................... P. 138 [HOST SELECT] switch ..................................................... P. 138 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 137 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack...................................... P. 137 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 136 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 136 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ............................................... P. 136 DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 136 PSR-A1000 19 Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing the Demos Reference on page 49 The PSR-A1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles. Demo button What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument — letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PSR-A1000 in your own music. 1 2 Press the [DEMO] button automatically plays MENU DEMO back the Demo songs at random. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo categories. BACK NEXT HELP FUNCTION Voice Demos showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSRA1000 (page 49). For this example, FUNCTION is selected. Function Demos demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000. 3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs. For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button. All of the function demos are played back in sequence. MAIN A F B G C H D I E J For details about the Demos, refer to page 49. LAYER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LEFT 8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-A1000 even better with these functions: • Song playback (page 21) • Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26). 20 Quick Guide Song Playback Song Playback Reference on page 67 Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of the PSR-A1000 come together — in songs! Song related buttons Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 135) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons Floppy disk drive The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-A1000. Refer to pages 66, 142 for more details on the logos. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard. Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Playback of Songs 1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive. CAUTION • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Quick Guide 21 Song Playback 2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. From the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on), you can select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc. A B C D E FLOPPY DISK (commercially available songs, your own songs, etc.) PRESET (Songs for Demos) Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive. In the example display at left, the PRESET page is selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected. 3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder. A B C D E 22 Quick Guide Song Playback 4 5 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. REC TOP NEW SONG 6 START/STOP • To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button. • With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. See page 71 for details. SYNC. START While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on — letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly! 1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off. CHANNEL ON/OFF PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If the STYLE tab is selected, press this button again. Quick Guide 23 Song Playback 7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts — the song, the style, and your playing. 1) Press the [BALANCE] button. 2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust. BALANCE You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button (page 112). 1 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 24 2 Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START • The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 62) can be used to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment. Playing Voices Playing Voices Reference on page 51 The PSR-A1000 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands. Voice related buttons Playing a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting MAIN voice. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Turn MAIN on. MAIN F LAYER G H The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 53 for more information.) LEFT I J You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. 2 Select a voice group. For this example, STRINGS is selected. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the voice. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide 25 Playing Voices 3 Select a voice. • You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A] - [J] buttons. A B C For this example, ”Strings” is selected. D E Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages — and discover even more voices. 4 Press the [8▲] button to start the Demo for the selected voice. To stop the Demo, press this button again. There’s more to the Demo features than just voices, though–for more information, see page 49. Play the voices. Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also have the PSR-A1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on. MAIN LAYER 2 3 4 5 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part. LEFT Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group. Select a voice. For example, select “Gothic Vox.” Play the voices. Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve selected here. And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features: • Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 79). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 76). 26 Quick Guide Playing Voices Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part on. MAIN LAYER LEFT 2 3 4 5 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part. Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand. Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. For example, select “Symphon. Str.” Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 122). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 122.) MENU DEMO A B HELP C D FUNCTION E 6 7 Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices). MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand. Split Point LEFT Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. MAIN/LAYER EXIT Quick Guide 27 Playing Styles Playing Styles The PSR-A1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra. Reference on page 56 Style related buttons Playing a style 1 Select a style group and a style. A B C D E For this example, DANCE & BALLROOM is selected. 2 For this example, VienneseWaltz is selected. Turn ACMP on. The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” area, and chords played in this area are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style. Split Point ACMP Auto Accompaniment area 28 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the style. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide • The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment area and the right-hand area of the keyboard is called the “split point.” Refer to page 122 for instructions on setting the split point. Playing Styles 3 Turn SYNC.START on. SYNC. START 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment area 5 6 7 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary. Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display. The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the [TAP TEMPO] button (page 48). Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 59. Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style. And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features: • Easily create your own original styles (page 79). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 76). Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too. 1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on. LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN HARMONY/ MONO ECHO DSP VARIATION 2 Turn ACMP on (page 28). 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. The PSR-A1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 127). The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice. For details about Harmony/ Echo types, refer to the separate Data List. • Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 54). Quick Guide 29 Playing Styles Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings, Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements. INTRO MAIN BREAK ENDING 1-3 4 This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29. Press the [INTRO] button. 5 MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment area When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section. 6 7 8 30 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK] button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure on the next page.) MAIN BREAK Quick Guide ENDING / rit. or Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if necessary. Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. Press the [ENDING] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. INTRO AUTO FILL IN FADE IN/OUT MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. Playing Styles ■ Accompaniment Structure INTRO (page (page 63) xx) INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C INTRO D (max. four patterns) MAIN VARIATION via BREAK MAIN VARIATION B via BREAK MAIN VARIATION A MAIN VARIATION C via BREAK MAIN VARIATION D via BREAK Press the [ENDING] button. ENDING ENDING(page (page xx) 63) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C ENDING D You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back. (max. four patterns) • An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point. • Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in. • Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want. • If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing. • If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section. Other Controls FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT TAP TEMPO TAP TEMPO SYNC.STOP SYNC. STOP The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 62)when starting and stopping the style. The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see page 48. When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. For details, see page 62. Quick Guide 31 Playing with the Songs Playing with the Songs Reference on page 66 Song related buttons Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 In this section, try using the PSR-A1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform. 1-4 5 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23. Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part. TRACK 1 To cancel the left hand part, press the [TRACK 2] button. (R) 6 If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. A B C D E 7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part. If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ buttons. REC NEW SONG 8 START/STOP SYNC. START Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 32 TOP Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START ][ ] • If you want to start the song right away without an intro, use the Sync Start function. To set Sync Start to standby, simultaneously hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the melody. • If you can hear the PSR-A1000 playing the melody part as well, check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data, and change the channel assigned to Track 1 (page 121). You can also change the song channel itself permanently (page 94). Playing with the Songs Recording The PSR-A1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance. 1-3 4 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26. Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording. REC TOP NEW SONG 5 START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button. SONG REC EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) 6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. 7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button. REC 8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. REC NEW SONG 9 TOP START/STOP SYNC. START CAUTION The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power. To keep your important recordings, you’ll need to save them to the User drive or floppy disk. Save the recorded data as required (pages 35, 41). Quick Guide 33 Setting an Oriental Scale Setting an Oriental Scale The Scale Setting feature lets you easily lower the pitches of specific notes by 50 cents to create your own oriental scales. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall (Scale Memory), whenever you need them. Reference on page 72 Scale related buttons 1 2 The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). Press the button corresponding to the key whose pitch you want to lower (the button lights). Press again to return to normal pitch. The scale settings you set are memorized by the Scale Memory function. While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY buttons. You can recall the memorized setting by pressing the appropriate button at any time. To maintain the memorized scale settings even after the power is turned off, make sure to save the settings as a file (page 74). In the SCALE TUNE display, you can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes (page 72). 34 Quick Guide Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data The PSR-A1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-A1000; you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument. All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer. Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the PSR-A1000 in files and folders. Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder. The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button. Open/Save display for Style (page 56) handles the Style files. Open/Save display for Song (page 67) Open/Save display for Voice (page 51) handles the Song files. handles the Voice files. A F B G C H D I E J The following Open/Save display types are also available; however, these are selected from displays other than the MAIN display (page 135). • SYSTEM SETUP • MIDI SETUP • USER EFFECT If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 64, 109) Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 77) Open/Save display for Scale Bank (page 72) handles the Multi Pad Bank files. handles the Registration Bank files. handles the Scale Tune Bank files. PSR-A1000 35 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Example — Open/Save display for Voice Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages. PRESET drive The files that are preprogrammed and installed internally to the PSR-A1000 are kept here. Preset files can be loaded but cannot be re-written. However, you can use a preset file as a basis for creating your own original file (which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive). USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data, created or edited using the various functions of the PSRA1000. They are stored internally to the PSR-A1000. FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to floppy disk. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here. Naturally, these files are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive. BACK NEXT Changes drives among PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK. Calls up the upper level directory page. In this example, the voice folder selection page can be called up. File All data, both preprogrammed and your own original, are stored as “files.” 36 PSR-A1000 Current Memory “Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Recording songs (page 83) and creating accompaniment styles (page 99) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Selecting Files and Folders Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file. First, press the VOICE [PIANO] button to call up the display containing the files. This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files). The PSR-A1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section. “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY 1 Select DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT] button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT ENTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATA ENTRY the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to 2 Use turn the pages. 3 Select the file/folder. When the available number of pages exceeds eight, the bottom of the display changes as shown below. Press Next Press Prev.(previous) There are two ways to select the file/folder: • Press the [A] - [J] button. Press the letter button corresponding to the file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example display shown above, the voice files are shown.) • Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the highlight moves among the available files/ folders. Highlight the desired file or folder (voice files are shown in the example above) and press the [ENTER] button to call up the selected item. Double-clicking the appropriate [A] -[J] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. Highlighting the desired file and double-clicking the [ENTER] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. END Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display. You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Exiting from small pop-up windows You can also exit from small pop-up windows (such as in the illustration below) by pressing the [EXIT] button. PSR-A1000 37 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data File/Folder-related Operations Naming Files/Folders You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to rename, copy them beforehand (page 40) and use them as User files/folders. 1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 35). A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters (or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID (see the note below) and the extension. The NAME display appears. 2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The file name will appear on your computer as follows. If you change the Icon ID or the extension, the icon may change or the file may not be properly recognized. ABCDE.S002.MID A F B G C H D I E J 1 END 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input the new name (page 42). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 38 PSR-A1000 File ID Icon ID Extension Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Moving Files/Folders You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 35). The CUT display appears. This operation cannot be used to directly move a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, cut and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the USER page, then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page. 2 Select the desired file/folder for moving. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to release or cancel the selection. All files/folders in a floppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch (page 134). After being pasted, the files are automatically re-ordered in alphabetical order and displayed. 3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. END Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination. About files/folders in a floppy disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open/Save display, only the files which can be handled in that Open/Save display will appear — even though a folder in a floppy disk can contain different kinds of files. In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for floppy disk), an entire folder can be cut; however, only the specific files which can be handled in the current Open/ Save display will be pasted. PSR-A1000 39 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Copying Files/Folders You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 35). Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only. The COPY display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the currently selected folder (PRESET/ USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. Press the [7▼] (OK) 3 button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. up the destination 4 Call display. END Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. This operation cannot be used to directly copy a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, copy and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the User page, then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page. Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination. Deleting Files/Folders You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted, using the operation described below. 1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 35). The DELETE display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. 40 PSR-A1000 END Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears. YES ......... Deletes the highlighted item. NO ........... Exits from the prompt without deleting. When several files have been selected, the message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears. YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or skips the highlighted item without deleting (NO). YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once. CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Saving Files This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current memory (page 36) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives. If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 35, 36). the [6▼] 1 Press (SAVE) button. Enter a name for the new file (page 42). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections. up the page to 1 Call which you wish to create a new folder and press the [7▼] (NEW) button (page 35). Enter the name of the new folder (page 42). The internal memory capacity of the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1440KB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. The files of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software, and their edited files on the PSR-A1000, can be stored in the USER page, but cannot be copied to another floppy disk. Folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 400, but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files which can be stored in a folder will be 250. Press the [8▲](OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Displaying Upper Level pages Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from the file level pages. Entering Characters and Changing Icons the [1▼] 1 Press (NAME), [6▼] (SAVE), or [7▼] (NEW) button (page 35). Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button. The following types of characters are available: CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon at the left of the file name. PSR-A1000 41 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone. 1 2 3 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button. If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the [7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the [7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is deleted. To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. ■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button (before actual entry of the character.) The following half-size marks cannot be used in naming files and folders: ¥\/:*?“<> | ■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a character by moving the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button. ■ Entering numbers Press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. 42 PSR-A1000 In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks, you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the file name. Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from the character input display (page 42). Select the desired icon by using the [A] - [J] buttons, or by using the [3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter the selected icon by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Turns pages for icon selection. Enters the selected icon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cancels the icon selection operation. Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display. ■ Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the example [BALANCE] display, turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display (highlight). To adjust the volume of another part, first select the part by pressing the [▲▼] button corresponding to the part, then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. DATA ENTRY ■ Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item can then be called up or executed by using the [ENTER] button. In the example VOICE display, you can select the desired voice file with the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up the selected item by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. ENTER DATA ENTRY PSR-A1000 43 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays DIRECT ACCESS With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 123). DIRECT ACCESS ACMP Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 45) for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. 44 PSR-A1000 Here’s a convenient way to return to the MAIN display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access Chart Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below SONG Corresponding LCD display and function [TRACK1] TRACK1 CHANNEL selection [TRACK2] [EXTRA TRACKS] FUNCTION TRACK2 CHANNEL selection SONG SETTING STYLE 121 121 121 [REPEAT] [METRONOME] See pages UTILITY [REC] — [TOP] — [START/STOP] — [REW] — [FF] — METRONOME settings 132 SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 122 [POP & ROCK] [LATIN & JAZZ] [DANCE & BALLROOM] [ ] [ [ ] [ ] FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT ] [USER] SCALE SETTING buttons SCALE MEMORY SCALE TUNE BANK [MEMORY] SCALE TUNE BANK [1]–[6] STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION 72 SCALE TUNE EDIT 74 CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection [BREAK] VOICE settings [INTRO] VOLUME/VOICE PANPOT settings MAIN [A] MAIN [B] MAIN [C] MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART) HARMONIC CONTENT settings FILTER BRIGHTNESS settings [ENDING/rit.] DIGITAL STUDIO EFFECT CHORUS settings FUNCTION UTILITY FADE IN/OUT setting STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting [SYNC. START] — [START/STOP] — [SOUND CREATOR] — [DIGITAL RECORDING] — FUNCTION [FUNCTION] [DIRECT ACCESS] UTILITY MIDI LANGUAGE selection 135 LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 133 MIDI settings 129 Exit from the Direct Access mode [BALANCE] MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) [CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOLUME settings VOLUME/VOICE [NEXT] VOICE settings 113 — [BACK] VOICE PART 122 — [DEMO] [HELP] 115 DSP settings [MIXING CONSOLE] MENU 114 REVERB settings [AUTO FILL IN] [SYNC. STOP] 113 VOLUME settings MAIN [D] [FADE IN/OUT] 122 — [MAIN] [LAYER] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE [SCALE TUNING] SCALE TUNE BANK SCALE TUNE BANK [EXIT] Return to the MAIN display OCTAVE settings 114 [LEFT] [ENTER] VOICE EFFECT — [LEFT HOLD] [TOUCH] FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 125 REVERB settings 115 [SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT [HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO [MONO] [DSP] MIXING CONSOLE 122 127 TUNE [VARIATION] VOICE 32 PORTAMENTO TIME settings DSP settings EFFECT EFFECT TYPE selection 114 115 [PIANO] [ORGAN & ACCORDION] [GUITAR] [TRUMPET] [SAX & FLUTE] [STRINGS] FUNCTION VOICE SET settings [E ] FUNCTION CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 125 [ E MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 114 E FUNCTION MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 129 UTILITY TAP settings 133 [CHOIR & PAD] 127 [SYNTHESIZER] [XG] [ ] [PERCUSSION] [USER] TRANSPOSE TEMPO ] [E ] [ ] [TAP TEMPO] UPPER OCTAVE [E ] — [ — E MULTI PAD ] [1] [2] MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT [STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 126 REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 77 [3] 64 [4] REGISTRATION MEMORY REPEAT / CHORD MATCH settings 110 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [MEMORY] PEDAL [PEDAL1] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) FUNCTION [PEDAL2] WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE CONTROLLER TUNE PEDAL1 function assignment PEDAL2 function assignment PITCH BEND RANGE settings 126 123 114 PSR-A1000 45 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Help Messages The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-A1000. HELP 1 MENU DEMO 2 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages: ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH HELP FUNCTION The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE” (page 135) display. 1 2-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2-2 Select the desired Help topic. 8 Call up the topic. Select the Language, if necessary. The language selected here are also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. 3 BACK NEXT When two or more pages available, use this to select different pages. ENTER END Press this to return to the previous display. EXIT DATA ENTRY Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. 46 PSR-A1000 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. METRONOME The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME] button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below). To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. The sound, volume level, and the beat (time signature) of the metronome can all be changed (page 132). Adjusting the Tempo This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style. TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET 1 TAP TEMPO TEMPO 2 RESET Press either the TEMPO [ button or the [ ] button. E Press this to ND close the TEMPO display. Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default (initial) tempo settings, designed to best suit the song/style. Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. ] EXIT When you change the tempo, both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same tempo. To restore their respective default (initial) tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo Indications — MAIN display” (page 48) for more about tempo. PSR-A1000 47 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Tap Tempo This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style. Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping. the song or the 1 Playback accompaniment style (page 56, 67). 2 TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice to change the tempo. ■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected song (unless the tempo has been changed manually). Indicates the current tempo for the selected song, accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back. When nothing is playing back (stopped), this indicates the tempo for the selected style. When the song and style are played back simultaneously, the tempo of the style is automatically changed to match the tempo of the song, and is displayed here. This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style (unless the tempo has been changed manually). 48 PSR-A1000 Hitting the [TAP TEMPO] button produces a tapping sound. You can change this sound, if desired (page 133). n You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo. While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button several times, and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. While a song is set to Sync. Start stand-by (page 57, 67), tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button starts the song playback in the same manner. For songs and styles in 2/4 and 4/4 time, tap four times; for 3/4 time, tap three times; for 5/4 time, tap five times. Playing the Demos The PSR-A1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-A1000. Reference MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION 1 MENU DEMO Pressing the [DEMO] button automatically plays back the Demo songs at random. HELP FUNCTION 2 2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category. Function Demos........ These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PSR-A1000. Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PSR-A1000. Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-A1000. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT 2-3 1 2-2 2 Use these to select different display pages. 3 4 5 6 7 Press one of these buttons twice — once to select the desired demo, and once again to start it. 8 Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page. All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs are played back in sequence. Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise available in step 3 below). PSR-A1000 49 Playing the Demos 3 For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing. BACK This example shows the Sound System in the FUNCTION demo. NEXT n Press the SONG [START/ STOP] button to stop the Demo song. To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped, press the SONG [START/ STOP] button again. Rewind and fast-forward can also be used with the Demo songs (page 69). MAIN F LAYER G H LEFT I J Select the desired word or item by using the [DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up. EXIT END Return to the MAIN screen. 50 PSR-A1000 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previous or next page. ENTER Voices The PSR-A1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and brass — and many, many more. Selecting a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice. MAIN Turn MAIN on. The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 53 for more information.) F LAYER G H I LEFT You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. J 2 Select the desired voice group. When you select a voice group, the last selected voice will automatically be selected. PSR-A1000 51 Voices 3 Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice (page 25). BACK 3-1 A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Select the memory location of the voice (PRESET/ USER/ FLOPPY DISK). Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited effect and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected (page 127). n You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength (page 125). n 3-3 Select the voice. For a list of the available voices, refer to the separate Data List. n 3-2 Select the various pages in the current voice group. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press this to start the demo of the selected voice. To stop the demo at any time, press this button again. 8 Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group. 4 Play the keyboard to hear the selected voice. END You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the voice name) are displayed or not (page 133). n Press this to return to the MAIN EXIT display. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Voice Characteristics The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name. Cool! These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drum Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Keyboard Percussion When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical. Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit. 52 PSR-A1000 Voices Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously The PSR-A1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance. MAIN LAYER LEFT Playing a layer of two voices LAYER part MAIN part Playing two voices separately — on the left and right sections of the keyboard Split point LEFT part MAIN part Left range Playing three different voices — one on the left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of two on the right Right range Split point LAYER part LEFT part MAIN part Left range Right range Layer — Layering Two Different Voices 1 Press this to turn the LAYER function on. To turn it off, press the button again. MAIN 2 Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 51). LAYER There is an alternate way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and LAYER voices from the panel: While holding down one panel voice button, press a second voice button. The first selected voice becomes the MAIN voice, and the second becomes the LAYER. LEFT F G H I J E Press this to ND return to the MAIN display. EXIT PSR-A1000 53 Voices Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard 1 Set the LEFT to ON. Press this button again to set it to OFF. MAIN 2 Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 51). LAYER The split point can be freely set to any key on the keyboard. (page 122). n Each part (MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT) can have its own volume setting (page 58). n LEFT F G H I J END EXIT You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this, set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard (as indicated), and set up a layer of two different voices on the right. Press this to return to the MAIN display. Applying Voice Effects This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard. LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN HARMONY/ MONO ECHO DSP VARIATION Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off. For explanations on each of the effects, see below. ■ TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. ■ SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You can also set the Sustain depth (page 82). ■ DSP The PSR-A1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). 54 PSR-A1000 The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 115). Voices ■ VARIATION This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 115), this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast. ■ HARMONY/ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard (page 127). The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide between successively played notes. ■ MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect, when playing in legato. ■ LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound. You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically (MONO). In this case, the melody you play — including the top notes of any chords — sounds monophonically. Try this using the following voices. MAIN voice: Brass Section (polyphonic) + LAYER voice: Sweet Trump (monophonic) PITCH BEND Wheel Use the PSR-A1000 PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. PITCH BEND The maximum pitch bend range can be changed (page 114). Adjusting the Octave setting The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave. UPPER OCTAVE RESET More detailed octave-related settings for each part can be made by using the Mixing Console function (page 114). PSR-A1000 55 Styles The PSR-A1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Playing a style 1 2 BACK A F B G C H D I E J 1 56 PSR-A1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NEXT For a list of the available accompaniment styles, refer to the separate Data List. 2-1 Select a location (Preset, User, Floppy Disk) for saving the style. 2-2 Select a Style. When you've opened a lower directory's display, this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher directory, from which you can select Style groups. Styles 3 When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.) STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN 4 START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP SYNC. START You can set the key range for auto accompaniment (page 122). MAIN BREAK INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT 5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment area, the style starts. For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 59. Split point The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] button. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. Auto Accompaniment area 6 Stop the style. SYNC. STOP SYNC. START START/STOP END Turn ACMP off. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK INTRO Sync. Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard. • You can begin the rhythm channels (tracks) of the Style by pressing the [START/STOP] button. • The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button. With the style stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button three, four or five times (three for 3/4 time, four for 2/4 or 4/4 time, five for 5/4 time). When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song, the accompaniment parts recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with the song (page 68). Accompaniment Style Characteristics The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display. Session! These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment. Piano Combo! (Floppy Disk) These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs. PSR-A1000 57 Styles Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only 1 The Rhythm channels are part of the styles. Each style has different rhythm patterns. Select a style (page 56). 2 You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC.START] button). Rhythm starts. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN INTRO BREAK ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Set to off. 3 Play along with the rhythm playback. The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. END Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button again to stop the rhythm playback. Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting BALANCE display MULTI PAD part Call up the BALANCE display. STYLE part (Auto Accompaniment area) SONG part BALANCE Parts played from the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/ LEFT) Adjust the output level of the Part. CHANNEL ON/OFF CHANNEL ON/OFF display PART Call up the Channel ON/ OFF display. 58 PSR-A1000 Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data (page 141). The channels are assigned as shown below. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 Styles Chord Fingerings The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 123), and select the Chord Fingerings. The page shows how to play chords with your left hand. SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used. For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord. FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page. FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C). FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Chord detection in the AI Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. In Full Keyboard mode, chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play. If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave, those two notes determine the chord. If the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one octave, the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave. AI Artificial Intelligence AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-A1000 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This mode is similar to FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played. PSR-A1000 59 Styles Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords) CmM7 CmM7 9 ( ) ( ( C5 CM7 5 Cm7 9 Cm7 11 ) CM7aug 11 ( Caug CM7 ) Csus4 CM7 9 CM7 ) C6 ) C9 ( C6 9 C Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 13 C7 9 C7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Normal Voicing Display for root “C” Major [M] 1-3-5 C Ninth [9] 1-2-3-5 C9 Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 Major seventh [M7] [M79] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 Flatted fifth [ 5] 11 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Major seventh augmented [M7aug] Minor [m] Minor ninth [m9] Minor sixth [m6] 1-4-5 1-3- 5 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1- 3-5 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh ninth [m79] Minor seventh eleventh [m711] Minor major seventh [mM7] [mM79] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5] Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7 9] Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13] Seventh ninth [79] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Diminished [dim] Seventh add thirteenth ] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11 1 - 3 - 5 C 5 1-3- 5-7 CM7 5 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Minor major seventh ninth 11 ] [713] 9 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm79 Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 9 C7 13 C79 C7 11 C713 C7 9 C7 5 Seventh sharp ninth [7 ] Seventh flatted fifth [7 5] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Seventh augmented [7aug] C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 Csus2 PSR-A1000 ) • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI FINGERED, if you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function). This let you play back only the rhythm. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based on the root and the fifth. • The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • You can also have the PSR-A1000 “teach” you how to play Fingered chords. From the CHORD FINGERING display (page 123), specify the chord you want to learn, and the notes you should press are indicated in the display. C7sus4 * Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion. 60 ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) ) ( Chord Name [Abbreviation] Major seventh ninth Csus2 ( ) 11 ( C7 C7 13 C7 9 ) ) ( ) ( C7 9 ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm Styles Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) The PSR-A1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Areas that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professionalsounding arrangement in your performance. 1 2 Select a style (page 56). 2-1 Turn the ACMP function on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO AUTO FILL IN 2-3 2-2 3 SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Turn the SYNC. START function on. Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section. Split point Auto Accompaniment area 4 Main sections can be shifted. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN Press this button to add breaks. FADE IN/OUT SYNC. START START/STOP You can also use this function to play only rhythms (page 58). • If you press the [INTRO] button, you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is playing. • Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons LED is green — The section is not selected. LED is red — The section is currently selected. LED is off — No section data; the section cannot be played. • You can dynamically control the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (page 122). • If you press the [SYNC. START] button while an accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the PSRA1000 will enter Synchronized Start standby status. • You can also change style sections by using the pedal (page 123). • The Break section lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. If you press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in will play back for one measure. • The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/ B/C/D) will flash while the Break is playing. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and the MAIN [A][B] [C][D] button is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the fill-in will begin from the next measure. PSR-A1000 61 Styles This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 5 STYLE CONTROL BREAK ACMP MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Fade-in/Fade-out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the button again. To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 132). Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, style playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard are released. Style playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment area is played. 1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on. 2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when SYNC. STOP is turned on. STYLE CONTROL BREAK ACMP MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN 3 SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT • Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. • You can select the Intro and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the MAIN window (page 63). • If you press the [INTRO] button while the ending is playing, the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the Main section. • You can begin the accompaniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section. In this case, the auto accompaniment doesn’t stop when the ending is finished. • If you select a different style while the style is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected. If the style is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. • When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accompaniment area in the keyboard (page 122). As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. Split point You can also use the SYNC. STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment area/left-hand range briefly (page 122). Auto Accompaniment area 62 4 The style stops when you release your left hand from the keys. 5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the style. PSR-A1000 END Press the [SYNC. STOP]/ [SYNC. START] button again to stop the style. Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off. Styles Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) 1 To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. A B C D E 2 3 D E Select a Intro Play the style using the Intro or Ending section (page 30, 31). Select a Ending Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In 1 2 STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play (page 30, 31). Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. END Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style. To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again. You can also add a fill-in by pressing the selected MAIN button again. You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next Main section’s button twice quickly. PSR-A1000 63 The Multi Pads The PSR-A1000 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads Playing the Multi Pads 1 2 Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 35). Press any of the Multi Pads. STOP MULTI PAD The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the phrase : • To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button. • To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop. • Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo. • You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time. • Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. Chord Match 1 2 Turn ACMP on (page 57). Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads. Split Point The Chord Match on/off status depends on the selected Multi Pad Bank. Auto Accompaniment area STOP MULTI PAD In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back. 64 PSR-A1000 The Multi Pad Multi Pad Edit This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another. Select the desired Multi Pad(s). Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 35) A F B G C H D I E J The same as the Open/Save display on pages 38 and 41. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the upper level directory page. 8 PSR-A1000 65 Song Playback Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 83), and commercially available song data. You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also display the lyrics in the LCD. SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF SYNC. START Compatible Song Types Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General MIDI). Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect sections and effect types. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI file format. 66 PSR-A1000 Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions, and is intended only for your own personal use. For more information on the song file types compatible with the PSR-A1000, see page 143. Song Playback Song Playback Playing the Internal Songs 1 BACK NEXT If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A F B G C H D I E J 2 2-1 2-2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back. 3 The song starts. SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) You can also make a variety of other settings (such as tempo, voice selection, etc.) and have them automatically called up when you play back the song (page 95). BACK Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK] button. NEXT You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the [TOP] button and the SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this function along with the Style’s Synchro Start function (page 57). A F B G n C H You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song. Simply press the [FADEIN/OUT] button at the start of song playback to fade in the song, and press it again at the end of the song to fade out. D I E J END TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC n TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF START/STOP To stop the song immediately, press the button again. EXIT NEW SONG SYNC. START Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 47) or the [TAP TEMPO] button. You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice. Songs can also be played back continuously. Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING display (page 121). Press the button in order to go back to the previous screen. Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 135) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. PSR-A1000 67 Song Playback Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the song’s chord data. • [ACMP] button .................. ...ON • [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON 1 2 3 4 Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Select the desired accompaniment style. Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE section buttons.) Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections. END The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped. Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback. 68 PSR-A1000 The accompaniment stops when you stop the song. If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song, the accompaniment automatically stops. However, for internal songs that use accompaniment styles, the accompaniment style is not stopped. Song Playback Playing Back Songs on Disk Before proceeding, make sure to read the section “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk” (page 7). Insert the disk into the drive. n Insert the disk shutter side first and label face up. The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions (page 67), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display. Other Playback-related Operations ■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, pressing this button returns the song to the beginning. REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button. SONG POSITION display When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. You can set whether or not the PSR-A1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted (page 134). n Some song data for the PSR-A1000 has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. During playback of such song data, the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. n Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. “PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark. ■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels BALANCE Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 58). CHANNEL ON/OFF Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below). PART CHANNEL ON/OFF display Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press that channel’s button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown below for the PSR-A1000. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 PSR-A1000 69 Song Playback Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play that part yourself. 1 Select the song to be played back (page 66). You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 (page 121), letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/ [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons. Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts (all but the right hand/left hand). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) METRONOME REPEAT Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part. All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song. Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part. Start the song. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ 3 REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW ][ ] buttons (page 47). END START/STOP FF To stop the song, press the button again. SYNC. START Repeat Playback of a Specific Range This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly. 1 Play back the song (page 67, 69). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REPEAT You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again. METRONOME Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to start (Point A). Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end (Point B). Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected first. n 3 4 After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly. Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] button returns to point A. Stop the song. START/STOP END REPEAT To cancel the Repeat function, press the button again. 70 PSR-A1000 Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song. n The specified A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number, cancelling the Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode — such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play (page 118). Song Playback Displaying the Lyrics This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback. 1 Select the desired song (page 67, 69). 2 A B C D E 3 If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. In this example, select “Lyrics” in the Function folder of the PRESET (SONG) page. If the selected song contains chord data, chord names are displayed with the lyrics. 4 SONG Start the song. EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC TOP NEW SONG 5 The lyrics are in reverse display along with song playback. END SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) START/STOP TRACK 1 (L) (R) NEW SONG METRONOME REW FF SYNC. START TRACK 2 REC REPEAT TOP START/STOP REPEAT METRONOME REW The lyrics can be changed (page 98). FF SYNC. START Stop the song. To return to the previous page, press the button. EXIT PSR-A1000 71 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory The Oriental Scales feature lets you simply and easily raise or lower the pitches of specific notes and create your own scales. You can change the scale settings at any time — even when you are playing. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting The [SCALE SETTING] buttons simulate an one-octave keyboard (C through B). You can easily change the scale setting at any time by pressing one of the [SCALE SETTING] buttons, located at the left side of the panel. Pressing each button turns the Scale Setting feature for the specific note on and off. The Scale Setting feature affects all the notes having the same note name in all octaves. When set to on (the selected button itself is lit), you can play the keyboard in the selected oriental scale. The scale setting for each note is -50 cents. You can also adjust the scale tuning in 1-cent units in the SCALE TUNE display. The [SCALE SETTING] buttons will light or go out according to the song playback data. The Scale Setting function has no effect on the Drum Kit/SFX Kit voices. Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning You can select a desired scale template including oriental scales and create your own scales by fine tuning the scale notes. Press the [SCALE TUNING] button located at the right side of display to call up the SCALE TUNE display. Selects which parts should be affected by the scale setting. Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲/▼] and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [8▲/▼]. Selects the desired scale template. BAYAT and RAST are two typical oriental scale settings. Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. 72 PSR-A1000 1 2 3 Selects the note to be tuned. 4 Adjusts the scale tuning of the selected note. [4▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps [5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps (–64 through 5 6 7 8 +63) Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting. When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template name shown at the top of the display will change to “EDITED SCALE” indicating some adjustment has been done from the preset scale template. The [SCALE SETTING] buttons will light when the tuning values of the corresponding notes are set to something other than “0”. Also, the values you set by using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons are automatically reflected in the SCALE TUNE display. Cent A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone). n You can register your original scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button. To do this, checkmark “SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display (page 76). Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Scale ■ Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. ■ Bayat/Rast Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. ■ Pure Major/Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing. ■ Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. ■ Mean-Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. ■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C) The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument. C C D E E F F G A A B B Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Bayat 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 Rast 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 PSR-A1000 73 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory The scale settings you set (using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display) are memorized by the Scale Memory function. Up to six scale settings can be stored for instant recall, whenever you need them. 1 Set up the scale settings as desired using the [SCALE SETTING] buttons or in the SCALE TUNE display. 2 While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. Any data that was previously in the selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The memorized scale settings here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation (see next section). Saving Your Scale Settings The scale settings memorized to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons are saved as a single file. BANK 01 All settings memorized to the buttons [1]–[6] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Scale Tune Bank files. 1 F G H I J 74 PSR-A1000 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/Scale Memory 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the SCALE MEMORY buttons as a single Scale Tune Bank file (page 41). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The SCALE TUNE EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. SCALE TUNE EDIT display The contents of the current Scale Tune Bank are listed in the SCALE TUNE EDIT screen. The names of the stored Scale Settings are shown in the display. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete each of the Scale Settings. Select..... Press the [A]–[C]/[F]–[H] buttons. The SCALE TUNE EDIT display is linked to the SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] buttons. When you select the Scale Settings in the display, the corresponding SCALE MEMORY button lights. Name .... This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete.... This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the SCALE TUNE BANK display by pressing the [8] (▲) button and save the data (page 41). Recalling the Scale Setting To recall the memorized scale settings, select the desired bank in the SCALE TUNE BANK display (page 72). Press the appropriate SCALE MEMORY [1]–[6] button to which you memorized the setting. The corresponding SCALE MEMORY button will light. The Scale Memory function can be turned off by pressing the SCALE MEMORY button which is currently lit, so that the light goes out. The default Equal Temperament Scale settings (pitch settings for all notes are “0” will be restored. If you press a SCALE MEMORY button to which nothing is memorized, the current scale settings remain and nothing changes. PSR-A1000 75 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-A1000 just as you want — selecting specific voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you. 1 Set up the panel controls as desired. For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). Keep in mind that songs or styles on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want to register a disk-based song or style, copy the relevant data to “USER” in the SONG/STYLE display (page 35) and register the data separately. REGISTRATION MEMORY 2 FREEZE MEMORY 3 Cancels the registration and returns to the MAIN display. You can also use the [EXIT] button. F Select the desired parameter groups for the settings you want to register. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to navigate in this display. To register a parameter group, checkmark the corresponding box. Groups left without checkmarks will not be included in the Registration Memory setting. This allows you to maintain certain settings, even when switching among Registration Memory presets. You can also use the Freeze function (page 78) to override the Registration Memory changes — letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed. E Press the desired ND number button for registering the settings. G H I J Enters a checkmark to the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected. Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered. The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform the Save operation explained on the next page. 76 PSR-A1000 Any data that was previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (indicator is green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file. All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Registration bank files. BANK 01 Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank files and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. 1 F G H I J 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file (page 41). The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets. Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on (indicator is red). Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 38) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 40) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 41). PSR-A1000 77 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Recalling a Registration Memory Setup You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset. Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 77). Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence, in any order you desire. Once programmed, the presets 1 - 8 can be selected in sequence with the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 126). REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Selecting the Freeze Settings 1 2 MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION Call up the “FREEZE” page from the REGIST.SEQUENCE/ FREEZE/VOICE SET screen (page 126). Enters a checkmark to the selected box. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. Select the Freeze settings. 3 Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE 4 MEMORY Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE 78 PSR-A1000 MEMORY Editing Voices — Sound Creator The PSR-A1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it as a USER voice for future recall. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR • The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song/style. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the voice. Operation 1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the voice you wish to edit. 2 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR F G H DIGITAL RECORDING I J MIXING CONSOLE The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display. CAUTION The settings are lost if the edited part's voice is switched to another voice. Important data should be saved to User Drive or floppy disk. PART 3 Edit the voice parameters. The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail starting on page 81. Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/ [BACK] button. Indicates the parameters available for editing in this display. These correspond to the parameters/values shown at the bottom of the display. Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice. Select the desired menu. The selected menu is highlighted. 4 Save the edited voice to the USER drive (Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 41). Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving the edited voice as a User voice (page 41). 5 Press the [USER] button to select the edited voice, and play the keyboard. PSR-A1000 79 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR- Sound Creator Parameters COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave. SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice. EFFECT Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings. HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings. Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main part’s voice. The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display. Common parameter Other location MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55 PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 114 FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 114 FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 114 REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 54 DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 115 DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 55,115 HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 127 COMMON The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. Set the volume of the current edited voice. Determines the touch sensitivity, or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. 0 —–– Produces more dramatic level drops, the more softly you play. 64 —– Normal response. 127 — Produces high volume for any playing strength (fixed) 80 PSR-A1000 Set the portamento time of each part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE) (page 114). This determines whether the voice is played monophonically (page 55). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves. When the Main or Layer part’s voice is used, the M/LYR parameter is available; when the Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT parameter is available. Editing the voice -SOUND CREATORSOUND The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the filter, EG, and vibrato settings (see below). 8 ■ FILTER FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. • BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency (resonance) range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. • Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Volume Resonance Resonance Frequency (pitch) ■ EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. • ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the slower the attack. Level • DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the slower the decay. ATTACK Key on • RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release. DECAY RELEASE Time Key off If RELEASE is set to a large value, the sustain becomes long. PSR-A1000 81 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR■ VIBRATO • DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. VIBRATO Creates a wavering in the sound by periodically changing the pitch. • SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). • DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. SPEED Level DEPTH DELAY Time EFFECT The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. Determines the DSP type. For information on the effect structure, see page 117; for a list of available effect types, refer to the separate Data List. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The same as the “Mixing Console” on page 115. Determines the Sustain depth of each voice when the [SUSTAIN] button is set to on. HARMONY The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 79. The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 128. 82 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 84), which lets you record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 85), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording (page 87), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 35, 41). SONG DIGITAL RECORDING EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF SYNC. START About Song Recording ■ Quick Recording (page 84) This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the auto accompaniment. ■ Multi Recording (page 85) This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance. ■ Step Recording (page 87) This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Song Editing (page 93) The PSR-A1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods. • The internal memory capacity of the PSR-A1000 is about 260KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-A1000 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. • Songs recorded on the PSRA1000 are automatically recorded as SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0) data. For details on SMF, see page 143. • Playback of the recorded song data can be transmitted from MIDI OUT, letting you play the sounds of a connected external tone generator (page 130). • The volume level of each channel of the song can be adjusted from the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even after you’ve set a voice for your keyboard play during recording, you can record voice selections, so that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 95). PSR-A1000 83 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Quick Recording This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so you can check your progress. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF 1 SYNC. START Select the desired song (page 67, 69). 2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song. If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON. Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well. 3 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record. You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time. To record your keyboard performance: Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance: Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. REC EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. 4 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123). END To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again. Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 123). ■ Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 35, 41). 84 PSR-A1000 If the "LAYER" or "LEFT" button is on before pressing the REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to different channels. The performance of track 1/2 is recorded to the channel specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 121). You can overdub a second right-hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the first right-hand performance (including the layer voices) on Track 1. To do this, set the [LEFT] button to OFF and repeat steps 2 and 3. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 35, 41). Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Multi Recording This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below. Channels Parts (default settings) 1 Voice MAIN 2 Voice MAIN 3 Voice MAIN 4 Voice MAIN 5 Voice MAIN 6 Voice MAIN 7 Voice MAIN 8 Voice MAIN Available parts Channels Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parts (default settings) Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 Available parts Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others. Chord ........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices. Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir. Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG 2 TOP START/STOP REW FF 1 SYNC. START Select the desired song (page 67, 69). Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel OFF......................... Mutes the channel To cancel or disable REC recording, press the [REC] button once again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to “REC” at the same time. 8 PSR-A1000 85 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded. This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the recording channels selected in step #2. For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 85. C D 4 5 6 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The recording can be started/stopped by pressing the foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is set to the pedal (page 92). To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 92). When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel — meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. A single part (with the exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several channels. The settings of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording, select a song, or turn the power off. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. Play back your new song. To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. CAUTION END 86 PSR-A1000 To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a finished song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 96). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 35, 41). Turning off the power automatically deletes your recorded performance. If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 35, 41). Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Individual Notes — Step Record This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately. Operation 1 Select an existing song (page 67, 69) to which you want to add parts or re-record. If you want to create a new song, simultaneously press the [RECORD] button and the [TOP] button. 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display. A 2 B Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR C D E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons, select the “1 -16” tab for recording melodies and other parts, or select the “CHD” (Chord) tab for recording chords, and after selecting the “1 - 16” tab, select a record channel with the [F] (CH) button. BACK NEXT F G H I J 5 Call up the Step Record display by pressing the [G] button. F Any voice, effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you call up the CHD (Chord) page. G H I J The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step recording. You can select voices from the PRESET page; however, these may sound slightly different from the original voice. PSR-A1000 87 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display, then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard. Moves the cursor position up and down. Returns the cursor to the beginning of the song (the first note of the first measure). Use these to move the selected event, in units of measures (BAR), beat, and clocks. For information on measure/beat/clock settings, see below. END A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody.) This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered (only when recording the melody). For information on velocity settings, see below. Determines the length of the note (as a percentage) from the position at which it is to be entered. (This is available only when recording the melody.) For information on gate time settings, see below. Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display: normal, dotted, and triplet. (This is available only when recording the melody.) 8 Deletes the event at the cursor. To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 41). ■ Measure/Beat/Clock Measure 1 Beat Clock 1 2 2 3 4 1 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 2 3 4 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 ■ Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values. Kbd. Vel Actual playing strength fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 ■ Gate Time The following settings are available: Normal ....................... 80% Tenuto ........................ 99% Staccato...................... 40% Staccatissimo .............. 20% Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. 88 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88. 1 1-1 1-2 Select this note. 1-3 2 While holding down this note... ...press this (to input a tie). 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-1 Select this note. 3 3-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes. 3-3 3-2 Select this note. 4 4-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button. 4-3 4-2 Select this note. To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note. ■ Play back the newly created melody Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 96). PSR-A1000 89 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 88. Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below. MAIN A C 1 BREAK F G F MAIN B G7 Enter the chords by using the currently selected chord fingering method in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. C Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C MAIN F C 001:1:000 F Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 2 G 001:3:000 G 002:1:000 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C BREAK F G F BREAK 002:3:000 INTRO G7 002:4:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 90 PSR-A1000 F G7 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right. MAIN A BREAK MAIN B MAIN C F G F G7 C C 003:1:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. ■ Play back the newly created chord progression Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display (page 97). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data. To enter a fill-in, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button and press one of the MAIN [A]– [D] buttons. END Mark An “END” mark is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song. When an Ending section is input, the End mark automatically follows the Ending data. When a section other than Ending is input, the End mark is set two measures after the final section. The End mark can be freely set to any position desired. PSR-A1000 91 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording. To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation steps 1 - 3 on page 87. These settings determine how recording will start. Normal Pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button enables Synchro standby and overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. F G Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. H I First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves the previous lead-in data, letting you record over the original lead-in without erasing it. J Determines the Punch Out measure — the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT” is selected). Punch In At The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure. 1 Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts (when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data. Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Punch Out This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped. When this is set to ON, you can use the foot pedal 2 to control the punch-in and punch-out points. (The current function assignment of the foot pedal is cancelled.) Press and hold down the foot pedal to record. Recording stops when you release the pedal. Punch Out At Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons), then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally. About Punch In/Out This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 92 PSR-A1000 Original data 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 8 5 *1 When measures 1 - 2 are not overwritten, recording starts from measure 3. *2 You’ll have to press the [REC] button at the end of 5 measures. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start/start overwrite recording *1 Start/ play back original data 7 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 6 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 5 2 3 4 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 5 4 5 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing a Recorded Song Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing features to change the song data. Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons. Quantize Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values. Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value (see below). Use this to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Quantize operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Quantize results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats only by the specified amount. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Selects the quantize size (resolution). See the below for the details. Selects the desired channel to be quantized. ■ About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4 note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes. One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization Quantize Size 1/4 note 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note 1/16 note triplet 1/32 note 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet * The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. PSR-A1000 93 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Deletes all data in the selected channel. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. These select the channel to be deleted. 8 Mix This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Mix operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Mix results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed. 4 5 6 7 PSR-A1000 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 8 Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel. 94 All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Channel Transpose operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Channel Transpose results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16. To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel. Set Up You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the SET UP operation. Once SET UP has been executed, the operation cannot be cancelled or undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Use this to checkmark the selected item. Checkmarked items are stored with the song. Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song. Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback. Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button. PSR-A1000 95 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Note Events — 1 - 16 From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. Use these to move the cursor up/down and select the desired event. Determines the channel to be edited. A F Returns to the beginning position of the current song (the first note of the first measure). B G C H D I Use these to move the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the justedited value automatically enters that value. E J Calls up the Step Recording display (page 88). Calls up the Filter display (page 98), letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Holding this button down while using the [A] and [B] buttons lets you select multiple events. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location. Determines the current position of the event being edited. For coarse adjustment of the event value. For fine adjustment of the event value. Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location. Adds a new event to the Event List. If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value. Copies all selected events. The copied events can be pasted to another location. Deletes the event at the cursor position. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Note Events Parameter Note Ctrl (Control change) Prog (Program change) P.Bnd (Pitch bend) A.T. (After touch) Description Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note. Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to the separate Data List booklet (Voice List). Determines the pitch bend value. Determines the after touch value. The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original. 96 PSR-A1000 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Chord Events — CHD From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). A F B G C H D I E J Press this to convert the recorded chord and section entries into song data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Chord Events Parameter Style (Accompaniment style) Tempo Chord Sect (Section) OnOff (Channel on/off) CH.Vol (Channel volume) S.Vol (Style volume) Description Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select the desired style. Determines the tempo value. Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note. Specifies the section — its name and variation. Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off. Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.). Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style. Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) From this display, you can edit recorded System events. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). System Events Parameter Description ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting. XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. PSR-A1000 97 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 87. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 96). In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 67 and 71. 1 Move the cursor to the event containing the lyric “star.” 2 Move the cursor to the word “star.” 3 Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics. From the Lyric display (page 42), enter the new word, “(your name).” A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Press this button to save the newly changed lyric data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. 8 Lyrics Events Parameter Description Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Customizing the Event List — Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list, remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or LYRICS (page 96 - page 98). Calls up the Main Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Calls up the Control Change Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). A F B G C H D I E J 1 END Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. 98 PSR-A1000 Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed. Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un-checked and vice versa. Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). EXIT Enters checkmarks for all items. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected item. Selects the item, scrolling up/ down one item at a time. When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just as with the preset styles. DIGITAL RECORDING STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN ENDING / rit. INTRO SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP FADE IN/OUT About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create. Section Channel INTRO A - D MAIN A - D ■ Realtime Recording (page 101) FILL IN A - D You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself — you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your own custom style. BREAK RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2 ENDING A - D For information on the part structure of accompaniment styles, see page 85. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop recording Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded. • Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts. ■ Step Recording (page 102) This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 103) This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8 Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one accompaniment style. 8Beat 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 60’s 8 Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Chord 2 8Beat 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 ■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 104) With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles. PSR-A1000 99 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Style File Format These are the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles (page 107). Source Pattern The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. By using the edit functions, you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles. The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm tracks.)The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the original style data. This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording (see below). As shown in the chart at right, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (played in Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern. 1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) 2 Source Chord (type of basic chord) Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard) Pitch Conversion 3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table) This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (page 59). These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. Other Settings 5 High Key (threshold of the pitch conversion) 6 Note Limit (soundable range) 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of the chord change) Output Operation 1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing. To record a new accompaniment style from scratch, call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select “New Style” by pressing the [C] button. 3 A B C D 2 E DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the various pages. 5 Call up the Style display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button), then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. H I J 100 PSR-A1000 END Press the [EXIT] button to close the STYLE CREATOR display. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Realtime Recording — Basic You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. 1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page” on page 102) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. Calls up the display for changing the tempo or beat (time signature). Selects an empty style, allowing you to create a new style from scratch. A B C D E Available only when the channel is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete specific percussion sounds during recording. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete. When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over channels containing data. To delete data from a specific channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to cancel. As long as you continue to hold down the F [J] button, you can toggle G between deleting and restoring the selected data. H Releasing the [J] button I permanently deletes the data. Before recording to J one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. REC .... Channel is enabled for recording. ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback. OFF .... Channel is muted. 2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/ STOP] button. The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys. 3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again. END With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing the [EXIT] button. If you’ve enabled Sync Start (by pressing the SYNC. START button), you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. • Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel. • For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), allvoices with the exception of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected. PSR-A1000 101 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Other Parameters in the Basic Display [I] (SAVE) button Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. [3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons Determines the section to be recorded. [5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure. [D] (Execute) button Executes the Pattern Length change. You can also select the desired section for recording by pressing appropriate panel button. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display, from which you can change sections by using the [6▲▼]/ [7▲▼] buttons. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] button.To select the Fill In section, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button. Recording — Precautions • The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source C R C C R C chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of C = chord note CM7), keep the following points in mind: C, R = recommended note * When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) * When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 107. • When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to “HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts. Step Recording With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. F G H I J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 96). • In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen. • When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change, etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.). Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 100) beforehand. 102 PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns — from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. 1 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style. Select the desired channel by pressing the [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same button to call up the Style screen, from which you can select the accompaniment style. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired, press the [J] (SAVE) button to save the assembled style data. From here, you can store the settings of all channels (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a single accompaniment style. 8 Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels, selected with the [A]-[D] and [F]-[I] buttons above. Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing. SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display (page 102) are played back simultaneously. ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101) are played back simultaneously. OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 101), OFF does not appear and is not available. If you change the section and channel in steps #1 and #2, the currently specified section and channel are also changed. The channels being recorded are also changed and recording is stopped automatically. The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback, and does not change the actual accompaniment style data. PSR-A1000 103 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Edit the Created Accompaniment Style Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. ■ Groove Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Groove operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters (see the list below). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Groove parameters 104 Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ■ Dynamics Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Dynamics operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 1 2 3 Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied. 4 5 6 7 Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. 8 Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters (see the list below). Dynamics parameters Accent Type Selects the type of accent. Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and, hence, the louder the sound. PSR-A1000 105 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Editing the Channel Data In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 100. See the explanations below. Preset channel BASSPHRASE 2 can not be edited. ■ Quantize Refer to page 93. ■ Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL) buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons). ■ Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. ■ Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared. ■ Remove Event This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons to select the desired event type to be removed. 106 PSR-A1000 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 100. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 100. When NTR is set to “Root Fixed” and NTT is set to “Bypass,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. See the explanations below. ■ Source Root/Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 102. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM711 CM7 CM79 C9 C69 C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm711 C R C C7 5 C C C C C C C C R C R C R C C C C C C C1+5 C C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C R C C C= chord note C, R = recommended note R C C C R C C C C79 Csus2 Csus4 C R C C7sus4 C713 C C C R C R C C R R C C C C C7 C C C R C Cm79 C C C79 C C R C C R C R C R C C R R C C R R C C C Cm9 C C713 C C R C C R Cdim7 C R C C1+8 C7aug CM7aug C C C R C Cdim C711 C79 C R C C C C C C C Cm75 C R C C CmM79 R C C R C Cm7 C R C C R C C C R C C C CmM7 C C R C R C Cm6 C R C R C C R C C R ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table) • NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available. Root Trans (Root Transpose) When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. PSR-A1000 107 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator • NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available. Bypass No transposition. Melody Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Chord Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. Bass Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines. Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. ■ High Key/Note Limit • High Key This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 107) is set to “Root Trans.” • Note Limit This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sound). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example — When the highest key is F Root changes CM CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C 3-F3-G 3 FM F3-A3-C4 FM F 2-A 2-C 3 Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM CM FM 3-C4 E3-G3-C4 F3-G F3-A3-C4 Notes played High Limit Low Limit ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. Stop The notes stop sounding. Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. 108 PSR-A1000 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator The PSR-A1000 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in the same way as the preset Multi Pads. STOP MULTI PAD Operation 1 Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for editing. To record a new Multi Pad from scratch, call up the RECORD page in the Multi Pad Creator display and select “New Bank” by pressing the [C] (NEW BANK) button. 3 A B C D 2 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G H NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the RECORD or EDIT page. 5 Call up the Multi Pad display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button, then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. I J END Press the [EXIT] button to close the MULTI PAD display. PSR-A1000 109 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109. Select the desired Multi Pad for recording or editing. You can also select it by pressing the MULTI PAD [1] to [4] button. A F B G C H D I E J Select this to engage the Record standby mode (synchronized standby). Select this to save the recorded pad data to USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Selects an empty Multi Pad bank, allowing you to create a new Multi Pad from scratch. Calls up the NAME display to input the new name. Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad on or off (see below). Start recording First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B). C R C C R C C = chord note C, R = recommended note Others: non-recommended note • Other notes besides those of the C major seventh scale can be recorded; however, this may result in the recorded phrase not matching the chord when being played back. • The rhythm part of the currently selected style is used as a rhythmic guide (in place of a metronome), playing back during recording. However, it is not recorded to the Multi Pad. Stop recording Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished playing the phrase. Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off ■ Repeat Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button. ■ Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords. 110 PSR-A1000 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 109. F F G G H H I I J J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 87), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 96). • Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback. • Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed. PSR-A1000 111 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound. Mixing Console This set of controls lets you adjust the balance of the voices and their stereo position, as well as the amount of effect that is applied to each voice. MIXING CONSOLE PART You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button (page 58). Operation MIXING CONSOLE 1 PART From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below. PANEL PART Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song. STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 - 8 Channels 1 - 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 -16 Channels 9 - 16 of song playback 2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 113. You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial to change the value. n For details on parameters related to the Sound Creator, see page 80. END Close the Mixing Console display by pressing the [EXIT] button. ■ About the parameters • VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 113) This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 143) with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the PSR-A1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song playback. • FILTER (page 114) These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound. • TUNE (page 114) These give you various tuning controls. • EFFECT (page 115) These control the amount of effect applied to the sound. 112 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. 1 Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special voices of the PSR-A1000. To use the normal XG voice set, turn this off. Use these to select the VOICE, PANPOT, or VOLUME parameter rows. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR The [RHY2] categories in the STYLE PART display are only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit (percussion) voice. n A F B G C H D I E J The [RHY1] channel in the STYLE PART display can be assigned to any voice except for the Organ Flutes voice. DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. n Allows you to select the specific voice to be replaced. These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 51). When the Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. 2 F ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the rich and authentic voices of the PSRA1000. G When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9 - 16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit voice. When changing the rhythm/ percussion voices (drum kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the song and playing back from that point. In the case of accompaniment style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same style again. Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound, depending on the particular song data. H I J BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices. 1 2 3 Selects the XG voices to be replaced (voices usually used when playing back) 4 5 6 7 8 Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display. Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings. Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON). PSR-A1000 113 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters. For details about the Filter, see page 81. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR n A F B G C H D I E J DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Be careful with these controls. Depending on the selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or distortion. Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (see “Harmonic Content” on page 81). BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 81). 8 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING. A F B G C H D I E J Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next. Refer to the explanation below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units. MASTER ...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback. SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback. KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard. PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 55, 80), this determines the Portamento time. The higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button. TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument. 114 PSR-A1000 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Adjusting the Effects The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 112. 1 Indicates the type name for each effect block. Press this to edit and store the effect (page 115, 116). DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR A F B G C H There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). For details, refer to the Effect Block list (page 116). DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART D I E J Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switches among the effect sections: REVERB, CHORUS, and DSP. 8 Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 116. 2 F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB, CHORUS, or DSP1-4/DSP, press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects. These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect. BLOCK............Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects). PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion.” CATEGORY.....The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block. TYPE ...............Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block. PSR-A1000 115 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console 3 A F B G C H D I E J Switches between the upper/lower parameters. For the lower parameter, the depth can be changed when the [VARIATION] button is on. Calls up the display for storing the effect. Determines the level of the effect (return level). This is not available when BLOCK is set to “DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion.” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the effect block. Determines the value of the selected parameter. Determines the effect category. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted. Determines the effect type. 4 F Calls up the display for naming the User Effect (page 42). G Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. H I J Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored. The number of memory spaces available for the destination differs for each block (refer to the chart below). Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location (SYSTEM) for future recall. To call up the effect, select USER from the CATEGORY parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Effect Block Block REVERB CHORUS DSP 116 PSR-A1000 Parts Characteristics All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. Number of User Effect 3 All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. 3 Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), Style In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this section features a variety of special effects, including distortion. 3 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Effect Structure The PSR-A1000 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel controls. About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects. The DSP effect can be configured for either System or Insertion routing. The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return controls set on the PSR-A1000. DRY LINE Dry MAIN VOICE DSP Rev Send When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here PART is set to MAIN), it is put here in the signal flow. Cho Send REVERB Reverb Return DSP Send Dry LAYER VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send OUT CHORUS Chorus Return Dry LEFT VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry STYLE/SONG (each channel) Rev Send Cho Send When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow. DSP Send DSP DSP Return PSR-A1000 117 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-A1000 to your own musical needs and preferences. FUNCTION Operation 1 MENU DEMO 2 Select the desired function. HELP FUNCTION 3 Set the parameters of the selected function. The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations. END To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. Adjusting the Pitch — Master Tune ■ Master Tune (page 120) This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 121) These allow you to set parameters related to song playback. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering ■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 122) These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point. ■ Chord Fingering (page 123) This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display. 118 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller ■ Pedal (page 123) These settings determine how the connected foot pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches) are used. They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting you control operations with your feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/ off, or triggering Fill In patterns. ■ Keyboard / Panel (page 125) These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard (how touch affects volume), and the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song data, and entire instrument). Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ■ Registration Sequence (page 126) This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal. ■ Freeze (page 126) This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. ■ Voice Set (page 127) This lets you determine whether certain voice-related settings (such as Effects, Harmony, etc.) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. Making MIDI Settings ■ System (page 129) These determine various system messages settings (such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well as Local Control on/off. ■ Transmit (page 130) This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel. ■ Receive (page 131) This determines how the parts of the PSR-A1000 respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel. ■ Root (page 131) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root notes, for use with the auto accompaniment. ■ Chord Detect (page 131) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the chords, for use with the auto accompaniment. Other Settings — Utility ■ Config 1 (page 132) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound. ■ Config 2 (page 133) From this page, you can adjust the display, and change the voice number indication. Setting Harmony and Echo (page 127) ■ Disk (page 134) These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the amount of effect. ■ Owner (page 135) From this page, you can format disks, and copy from disk to disk. From this page, you can set the language of the instrument, and input your own name — which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on. ■ System Reset (page 135) This function restores the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored, as well as store your own original settings for future recall. PSR-A1000 119 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Fine Tuning the Pitch — Master Tune The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune Hz (Hertz) This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound, and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. n The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. 1 120 PSR-A1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the overall pitch of the PSRA1000, from 414.8 466.8 Hz. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously. Turns Quick Start on/off (see note). A F B G C H D I E J Quick Start On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000 reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. n 1 Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK2] button. Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK1] button. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off. When this is on, you can repeatedly play back a specified phrase (selection of measures) of the song. The method for setting a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display (page 69). Channel Refers to the MIDI channel (page 141). The channels are assigned as follows: Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 n Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” PSR-A1000 121 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point F G H I J These select the part to which the split point setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand range, or both. Press the desired key for the split point while holding down one of these buttons. The pressed key is included in the range for the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard (ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). A+L (ACMP + LEFT) Allows you to simultaneously set the split point for both the left-hand range and the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. About Section Set When any of the Main A-D sections is not included in the accompaniment style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when Main D is not contained in the selected accompaniment style, Main C will be called up. L (LEFT) Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard. A (ACMP) Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these buttons by themselves to set the split point value. Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped). Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard). The PSR-A1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 62) simply by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time. Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords — even when the accompaniment style is not playing back. About Split Point Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto Accompaniment area (ACMP) and left-hand area (LEFT) from the righthand area (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the LEFT split point. Split point (A) Auto Accompaniment area Right-hand Left-hand area area Split point (A) + (L) Auto Accompaniment area + Left-hand area 122 PSR-A1000 Split point (L) Right-hand area Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord. Some notes can be omitted. The chord name is indicated next to “CHORD NAME.” .. Required .. Can be omitted .. Either note can be omitted .. Can be omitted when the note indicated by is omitted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This lets you change the chord type. Determines the fingering type (page 59). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord in the music. The chord indication in the display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if another method is actually selected. Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons, and the fingerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display. This lets you change the root note from the chord. Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Making Settings for the Pedals Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 Determines the function to be assigned to the selected pedal. Any one of the available functions can be assigned to each pedal. For information on the assignable functions, see “Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jack. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/ brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation. If necessary, you can turn the corresponding part ON/ OFF or set the control depth (see the next page). PSR-A1000 123 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Pedal-controllable Functions VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume. SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 114). PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel. MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the MODULATION wheel. DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button. SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button. SYNCRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button. INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button. MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button. MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button. MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button. MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button. FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing. BREAK Break starts playing. FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 59). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button. LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. SONG, STYLE, LEFT, LAYER, MAIN These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. 124 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel Keyboard Touch The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. Selects the desired parameter: Keyboard Touch or Transpose Assign. HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume. A B C NORMAL Standard touch response. D SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. E Determines the Touch sensitivity setting (Keyboard Touch only; refer to the table at right). Determines the fixed volume level when touch is set to “off” (Keyboard Touch only). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch (page 80). Determines whether Touch is on or not for the corresponding parts. Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button. Transpose Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices, accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units. 1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. TRANSPOSE RESET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears. 3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. 8 KEYBOARD For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and the accompaniment styles. SONG For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of the songs. MASTER For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the entire instrument (keyboard voices, accompaniment styles, and songs). The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. END Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the [EXIT] button. • Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song These settings can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key. PSR-A1000 125 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play. Indicates the file name of the selected Registration Memory bank. Determines which pedal is used to advance (increment) through the sequence. Determines which pedal is used to reverse (decrement) through the sequence. Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. Stop Pressing the [NEXT] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” Top The sequence starts again at the beginning. Next Bank The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory bank in the same folder. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turns the Registration Sequence function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the programmed Registration Sequence is shown at the top right of the Main display, and you can step through the sequence in this display by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedals. Deletes the number at the cursor position. Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position. Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. END 8 n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons can be used in the MAIN display. n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to the same pedal, “Regist (+) Pedal” takes priority. Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the sequence. Indicates the Registration Memory preset numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. These move the cursor position in the sequence. 7 Setting Registration Sequence Enable to “ON” overrides any other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” here). These include the pedal settings on page 123, and in Voice Set on page 127. Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank file. To save your newly programmed Registration Sequence, store the current Registration Memory bank file (page 35, 41). Any Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory banks, unless you’ve stored it with the Registration Memory bank file. Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. For details, see page 78. 126 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page. Normally, these should all be set to “ON.” A Use these to select the desired part. B C Harmony/echo cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts. D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice selection, Effects, and Harmony/echo assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part. Setting Harmony and Echo The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Determines the Harmony type. For details, see page 128. 1 2 3 4 5 Determines the level of the Harmony effect. Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. 6 7 8 Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Accompaniment area of the keyboard. This parameter is not available when Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts. For details, see page 128. PSR-A1000 127 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function About the Harmony Types When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected Split point Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony. Harmony notes (based on the chord and the selected type) are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point. When “Multi Assign” is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice. When “Echo” is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Tremolo” is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Trill” is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo. About the Harmony Assignments AUTO Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts. Multi This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice. Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. 128 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the MIDI Parameters In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 139). The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. 1 A F B G C H D I E J 1 3 Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set) Select the desired template. 2 3 4 Call up the User display and press this button to save the newly edited MIDI settings. Up to ten setups can be saved. 5 2 6 7 All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer and Left. Master KBD The PSR-A1000 functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices. KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts (Main/ Layer/Left). Song All Transmit channels are set to correspond to the Song channels 1-16. Use this to play the PSR-A1000 song data with an external tone generator, or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer. Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and PSR-A1000 synchronizes with a external MIDI device. MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion. MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment style, as well as play the chord and bass parts. MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment. MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal plays the bass part. MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received. 8 Call up the Edit display, then select and set the desired functions/parameters. For details about each of the MIDI edit displays, see the following pages. The saved settings can be named (page 38) or deleted (page 40) in the User page. END Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System Call up the display as described in step 2 above. For editing the Local Control parameters. For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop parameters. For editing the Message Switch parameters. Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-A1000 controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-A1000’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-A1000’s internal voices, and use the PSR-A1000 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. PSR-A1000 129 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop ■ Clock Determines whether the PSR-A1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-A1000 is being used alone. If you are using the PSR-A1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-A1000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PSR-A1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. ■ Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted. ■ Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-A1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-A1000 keyboard transpose (page 125) setting. ■ Start/Stop Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or style playback. FA, FC MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA” message corresponds to start, and “FC” corresponds to stop. Message Switch SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF. SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and type) ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. A Determines the channel for changing transmit settings. B C D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns transmission of the specified data type on or off. See below for details on the data types. Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data. Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers. Pitch Bend (PB) See page 124. After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-A1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique. * Available in RECEIVE display only (page 131). 130 PSR-A1000 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Receiving MIDI Data — Receive This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Determines the channel for changing receive settings. B C The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive parts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns reception of the specified data type on or off. See page 130 for details on the data types. MIDI Receive Parts OFF SONG MAIN LAYER LEFT KEYBOARD ACMP RHYTHM1-2 ACMP BASS ACMP CHORD1-2 ACMP PAD ACMP PHRASE1-2 EXTRA PART1-5 No MIDI data is received. Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16 correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively. The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. MIDI note data received by the PSR-A1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard. The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2. The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS. The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD. The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2. There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator. Setting Root Note Channels — Root The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port A of the TO HOST terminal (Port A of the CBX driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO HOST terminal (Port B of the CBX driver) corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Selects the channels in groups of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 - 32, respectively. B C D E When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sets all channels to OFF. Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above. PSR-A1000 131 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Other Settings — Utility The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 118. Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1 Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out. Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the metronome sound. Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. 132 PSR-A1000 Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. When you start the song or accompaniment style, the values matching to them are automatically set. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Parameter Lock This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls — in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, or song and sequence data. Selects the desired parameter for locking/ unlocking. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the selected parameter is locked (checkmarked) or unlocked (empty). Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 48). Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function. Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit (page 52) can be selected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the tap sound. Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2 Determines the brightness of the backlit display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display (page 51). This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB/LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device. PSR-A1000 133 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk This function copies all the data from one disk to another, letting you back up all your important data before editing. For instructions, see “Copying from Disk to Disk” below. F G H I This function formats a floppy disk (see below). J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-A1000 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted. Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-A1000, then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk. 1 3 Press the [F] button. A message appears, prompting you to insert the source disk. At the “Please insert a destination disk and press the OK button ” prompt, eject the source disk and replace it with a blank, formatted disk, then press “OK.” To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” 2 4 Copy When the operation is finished (or when prompted), eject the destination disk. Disk Lamp When the power is turned on, the disk lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the DISK page above. PSR-A1000 Internal memory Insert the disk containing the original data into the drive and press “OK.” A “Now copying” message appears, and the PSR-A1000 begins copying data to internal memory. To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly format it on the PSR-A1000. This includes blank disks as well as disks already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the disk. 134 • Copying cannot be done between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk. When copying, make sure both disk are the same type. • Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk, you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied. • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Source disk Copy Destination disk Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Some music software is purposely copy-protected and cannot be copied. The Format operation initializes a disk with a specific file system, allowing the corresponding device (in this case, the PSR-A1000) to access it properly. Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should know which ones to use with the PSRA1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB. CAUTION Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk. Make sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner F G H Press this button to enter an Owner name (for instructions on naming see page 42). This name is automatically shown when you turn the power on. I J Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000 — System Reset This operation lets you restore the PSR-A1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI Setup, User Effect, and Files & Folders. Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power. Restores the MIDI templates to the original factory settings. Restores the User Effects (page 116) to the original factory settings. A F B G C H D I E J The functions and settings below do not apply to the Factory Reset operation. However, you can restore these to their original settings by calling up the preset System Setup files from the PRESET page in the SYSTEM SETUP Open/Save display. Language Owner Name LCD Brightness Deletes all files and folders stored in the User page. 1 2 Executes the Factory Reset operation for all items checkmarked above. 3 4 5 6 7 8 These call up the corresponding Open/ Save displays. These let you store the corresponding data as files for future recall. From the PRESET page, you can also recall the respective factory settings. PSR-A1000 135 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices CAUTION Before connecting the PSR-A1000 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. 2 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/ OUTPUT jacks) You can connect the PSR-A1000 to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks. Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables. 1 Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. 1 Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). CAUTION A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 133). When the PSR-A1000 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the PSR-A1000, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. P.136 To powered speaker Audio cable 2 RCA pin plug Phone plug (standard) RCA pin plug AUX IN R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT DC IN 16V (LEVEL FIXED) R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT (LEVEL FIXED) Cassette tape recorder stereo system P.138 5 TO HOST Mac PC1 PC2 P.137 4 MIDI HOST SELECT IN MIDI OUT P.137 3 When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting. When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. 2 FOOT PEDAL • If you connect the PSR-A1000 to a monaural device, use only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack. 136 PSR-A1000 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices 3 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack) By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment. By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot — such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 123). The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be changed (page 123). CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off. 4 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PSR-A1000. Make sure to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when you use these connectors. For more information about connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on page 142. MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by the PSR-A1000 For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What’s MIDI? (page 139) • What You Can Do With MIDI (page 142) • MIDI functions (page 129) • Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters. PSR-A1000 137 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices 5 Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal) Connect your PSR-A1000 to computer and take advantage of the wide range of powerful and versatile software for creating and editing music. The PSR-A1000 can be connected in three ways. ■ Using the TO HOST terminal ■ Using the MIDI terminals ■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000. For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the personal computer type. If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250 bps.) USB interface (UX series) ■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows) • You’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform. • When connecting the PSR-A1000 to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the PSR-A1000 and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of the computer first, then that of the PSR-A1000. Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data transfer rate is 38,400 bps.) • If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-A1000, make sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is left connected, the PSR-A1000 may not function properly. • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST terminal. Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the PSR-A1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). The Floppy Disk that came with your PSRA1000 contains the compressed driver file “mididrv.zip.” After extracting the file, execute the installation by double-clicking on the “Setup.exe” file in the “MidiDrv” folder and follow the on-screen directions. In addition, you can download this driver from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS MINI DIN 8-pin Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 MINI DIN 8-pin D-sub 9-pin ■ Macintosh Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-A1000 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-A1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC” (Data transfer rate is 31,250 bps). Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. Mac PC-1 PSR-A1000 D-sub 25-pin NEC * When using a D-SUB 25P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a DSUB9P plug adaptor on the computer side of the cable. MINI DIN 8-pin 138 D-sub 9-pin MIDI PC-2 MINI DIN 8-pin Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Using the MIDI terminals Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96, etc.) When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-A1000 with standard MIDI cables. Connect the UX256/UX96 and the computer with a USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96 driver to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96 to the PSRA1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-A1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96. • When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN OUT MIDI NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS USB cable NEC MultiSync NEC UX256 MIDI IN PC-9821 AS MIDI OUT NEC Personal computer Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 Mac PC-1 • When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSRA1000, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” MIDI IN RS422 MIDI OUT MINI DIN 8-pin Mac PC-1 MIDI PC-2 • When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the TO HOST terminal is disabled. MIDI PC-2 For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owner’s manuals. What’s MIDI? Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. Digital instrument note production Internal amp L Tone generator (Electric circuit) Internal amp R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. PSR-A1000 139 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the PSR-A1000 features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PSR-A1000 — allows you to both record and play back the data. Tone generator Sequencer In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback Tone generator Keyboard performance (MIDI data) However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the PSR-A1000 fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. Sequencer Controller (keyboard, etc.) FD Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-A1000 can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. FD In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument. 140 PSR-A1000 Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-A1000 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ■ Example Keyboard Data Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Panel operations on the PSR-A1000, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-A1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.The PSR-A1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI songs to floppy disk. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. ■ Channel Messages The PSR-A1000 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting) Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc. MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel.Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report News 1 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2 The PSR-A1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI (page 129). For example, several tracks (channels) can be transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as shown below). Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-A1000 to an external sequencer MIDI cable or serial cable PSR-A1000 track (channnel) MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 External sequencer Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data. PSR-A1000 141 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 130). The PSR-A1000 also allows you to determine how the received data is played back. (page 131). ■ System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name PSR-A1000 Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-A1000 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSRA1000: • MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various applications) (page 129) • Transmit (page 130) • Receive (page 131) • Local Control (page 129) • Clock (page 130) ■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-A1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-A1000 (playback). PSR-A1000 MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC MIDI transmit Personal cumputer, QY series etc. When you want to use the PSR-A1000 as an XGcompatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 131). ■ Play and control the PSR-A1000 from a separate keyboard PSR-A1000 MIDI receive MIDI IN 142 PSR-A1000 MIDI OUT Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR-A1000, and whether or not the PSR-A1000 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • PSR-A1000 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the PSR-A1000, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices Sequence Format Voice Allocation Format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats. With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The PSR-A1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0. • Song data loaded to the PSR-A1000 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-A1000 series instruments.This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PSR-A1000 is compatible with the following formats. Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1, as is most commercially available software. ■ XG ■ XF XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. • Song data recorded on the PSR-A1000 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible. • The PSR-A1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. ■ DOC ■ Style File The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series instruments.This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software. PSR-A1000 143 Troubleshooting Problem 144 Possible Cause and Solution • The PSR-A1000 does not turn on; there is no power. Make sure that the PSR-A1000 has been plugged in properly (page 16). • A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument. • Noise is heard from the PSR-A1000’s speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-A1000 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the PSR-A1000. • The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature; try adjusting the contrast (page 17). • The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 58). • The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard. The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 113). • The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 58). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 58, 69). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 129). • Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-A1000. When this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. See page 146 for information on the maximum polyphony. • Accompaniment style or Song playback does not start. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 130). • Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 58); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 67). • “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display (page 67). • The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 69). • The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed. MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 130). • Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. • The accompaniment style does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed. You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard. • The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 60). • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 59). • An unexpected result or malfunction occurred during an operation. If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or unusual results may occur. • Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 59). PSR-A1000 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution • Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 72). • Some channels do not properly play back when playing back song data. Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 69). • The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 59). • MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly. Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 139). The MIDI terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings. • When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 127). • There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard. • Some voices have a looping sound. • Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. This is normal and is a result of the PSR-A1000’s sampling system. • Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. • Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk. • The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 114). • The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. • This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 115). • Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 81) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 53) or change the voice for each part (page 51). PSR-A1000 145 Specifications : available Model Name PSR-A1000 Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch) Voice Polyphony (max) 32 Number of Voices 276 regular voices + 480 XG voices + 20 Drum Kits Number of Oriental Voices 43 Number of Oriental Drum Kits 6 Number of Sweet Voices 3 Number of Cool Voices 1 Sound creator Effects Effect Blocks Effect Types Accompaniment Style Reverb 1 Chorus 1 DSP 1 REVERB 23 Preset+3 User CHORUS 15 Preset+3 User DSP 93 Preset+3 User Number of Accompaniment Styles 190 Number of Oriental Styles 123 Number of Session Styles 4 Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Style Creator Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ Preset Songs Lyrics Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record Channels 4 Pads ✕ 80 Banks Multi Pad Preset Memory Device Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD) Flash Memory (internal) Flash Availability Tempo 16 260KB Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc. Tempo Range 5 - 500 Tap Tempo Metronome Sound 146 PSR-A1000 Bell on/off Specifications Model Name Scale Scale Memory buttons Scale Template Registration Memory PSR-A1000 Scale Tuning Buttons 6 Equal Temperament, Bayat, Rast, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone, Werckmeister, Kirnberger 8 Regist Sequence Freeze Others Demo Language Function, Voice, Style 3 languages (English, German, French) Help Direct Access Master Volume Fade In/Out Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Tuning Touch Response Jacks/Connectors Pedal Functions Amplifiers/ Speakers VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc. Amplifiers 12 W ✕ 2 Speakers (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 Power Consumption 31 W Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included) *May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] (without Music Stand) Weight Optional accessories 5 level DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), TO HOST, HOST SELECT SW, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2, AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R) 973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm [38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"] 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz) Headphones HPE-150 Foot Switch FC4 / FC5 Foot Controller FC7 Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Thanks YAMAHA Corporation wishes to express our thanks to: Mr. Mohammed Saleh (Lebanon) Mr. Sairos Isa (Bahrain) Mr. Wadea Al Kandari (Kuwait) Mr. Fawaz Al Kandari (Kuwait) Mr. Arash Adelpour (Iran) Mr. Dimitris Vassiliou (Greece) Mr. Ahmet Can Basar (Turkey) Mr. Mehmet Dogdu (Turkey) for composing Styles/Demos and their cooperation. PSR-A1000 147 Index Numerics 1 - 16 ............................................................................. 87, 96 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 35–42 A A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 122 [A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 37 Accent Type ....................................................................... 105 Accessories ............................................................................ 6 Accompaniment style parts................................................... 85 [ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 57 ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 122 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 112 Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17 Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 115 Adjusting the Scale Tuning — Scale Tuning ......................... 72 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 47 Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 58 Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 69 Adjusting values ................................................................... 43 AI ......................................................................................... 59 AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 59 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 59 A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 122 Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 54 Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 61 Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 103 ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 82 ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 81 AUTO .................................................................................. 20 AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 121 [AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 63 Auto Revoice...................................................................... 113 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 136 B [BACK] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43 BALANCE............................................................................. 58 [BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 58 Bar Clear ............................................................................ 106 Bar Copy ............................................................................ 106 base note.............................................................................. 72 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 35 Bass...................................................................................... 85 Bayat .................................................................................... 73 Beat Converter.................................................................... 104 Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 105 [BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 61 BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 81 C Cent ..................................................................................... 72 Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 104 Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 114 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 127 Changing the Icon ................................................................ 43 Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 114 Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 125 Channel ................................................... 58, 69, 93, 106, 121 Channel Messages .............................................................. 141 Channel Muting ................................................................... 58 148 PSR-A1000 CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................58, 69 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 58, 69 Channel Transpose ...............................................................95 CHD .....................................................................................97 Chord ...................................................................................85 Chord Detect ......................................................................131 Chord Events.........................................................................97 Chord Fingering ............................................................59, 123 CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................82 Chord Tutor ........................................................................123 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................60 Chorus ................................................................................117 CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................82 Clock ..................................................................................130 COMMON ...........................................................................80 COMPARE ............................................................................79 Compatible Song Types ........................................................66 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................132 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................133 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................137 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................138 Controller ...........................................................................123 Cool! ....................................................................................52 COPY ...................................................................................40 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................134 Copying Files/Folders............................................................40 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................134 Creating Accompaniment Styles............................................99 Current Memory ...................................................................36 Customizing the Event List — Filter.......................................98 CUT......................................................................................39 D Data Compatibility..............................................................142 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 43 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........130 DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 136 DECAY .................................................................................81 DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................40 Delete (Song Creator)............................................................94 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................40 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 49 DEPTH..................................................................................82 DESTINATION......................................................................94 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button..........................14, 18, 83, 99 [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................19, 44 Direct Access Chart ..............................................................45 Disk ....................................................................................134 Disk format .........................................................................142 Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................17 DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER .................................................133 Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................71 Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................41 DOC...................................................................................143 Drum ....................................................................................52 [DSP] button ...........................................................19, 54, 117 DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator).................................................82 Dynamics ...........................................................................105 E ECHO ...........................................................................55, 127 Edit .....................................................................................102 Index Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 104 Editing a Recorded Song....................................................... 93 Editing Channel-related Parameters ...................................... 93 Editing Chord Events ............................................................ 97 Editing Note Events .............................................................. 96 Editing System Events ........................................................... 97 Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 106 Editing Voices ...................................................................... 79 EFFECT ................................................................................. 82 Effect Block ........................................................................ 116 Effect Connections.............................................................. 117 Effect Structure ................................................................... 117 Effects................................................................................. 115 EG ........................................................................................ 81 EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 81 EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 81 EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 81 Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29 END Mark ............................................................................ 91 ENDING .............................................................................. 63 [ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 62 [ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 43 Entering Characters............................................................... 42 Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 90 Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 42 Entering numbers ................................................................. 42 Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent)................. 42 Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 135 Equal Temperament.............................................................. 73 ESEQ .................................................................................. 143 Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 141 [EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 37 exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 37 Expand/Compress ............................................................... 105 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 70 F Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 132 [FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 62 [FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 69 File ....................................................................................... 36 File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 38 Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 39 Fill........................................................................................ 63 Filter....................................................................... 81, 98, 114 FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator)........................................... 81 FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81 Fine .................................................................................... 104 FINGERED ........................................................................... 59 FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 59 First Key On ......................................................................... 92 FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 36 FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN.................................... 134 Floppy disk drive .............................................................. 19, 7 FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ....................................................... 137 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH) ] jack................................. 19, 137 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack .................................................. 19, 137 Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 134 [FREEZE] button.............................................................. 19, 78 Freeze .......................................................................... 78, 126 FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 59 [FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 118 G Gate Time ............................................................................ 88 GM System Level 1 .......................................................17, 143 Groove ...............................................................................104 Groove parameters .............................................................104 GROUP SELECT....................................................................76 H Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7 Harmonic Content ................................................................81 HARMONY ............................................................55, 82, 127 Harmony Assignments ........................................................128 Harmony Types ..................................................................128 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................19, 55 Headphones .......................................................................136 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages.................................................46 [HELP] button .................................................................18, 46 High Key.............................................................................108 [HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 137 Hz ......................................................................................120 I ICON....................................................................................43 ICON SELECT .......................................................................43 Inputting and Editing Lyrics...................................................98 Instant Selection of Displays .................................................44 INTRO ..................................................................................63 [INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 61 K Kbd.Vel.................................................................................88 Keyboard Percussion.............................................................52 Keyboard Touch .................................................................125 Keyboard/Panel...................................................................125 Kirnberger.............................................................................73 L L (LEFT)...............................................................................122 Layer.....................................................................................53 Layering Two Different Voices ..............................................53 LCD ......................................................................................15 [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................19, 17 Left .......................................................................................54 [LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................19, 55 Local Control ......................................................................129 Loop recording .....................................................................99 Lyrics ..............................................................................71, 98 M MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................61 MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 61 MAIN [B] button .............................................................18, 61 MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 61 MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 61 Maintaining Panel Settings ..................................................126 Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................118 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)129 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap .................................................132 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication ........................................................................133 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ......................123 Making Style File Format Settings........................................107 Master Tune........................................................................120 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17 Mean-Tone ...........................................................................73 PSR-A1000 149 Index Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 88 Memorizing the Scale Setting – Scale Memory ..................... 74 [MEMORY] button (REGISTRATION MEMORY) ............. 19, 76 [MEMORY] button (SCALE MEMORY)............................ 18, 74 Message Switch .................................................................. 130 Messages ................................................................................ 8 Metronome ........................................................................ 132 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ 18 MIDI .................................................................................. 129 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals ........................................... 19, 137 MIDI channels.................................................................... 141 MIDI IN.............................................................................. 137 MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 137 MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 131 MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 135 MIDI terminals ........................................................... 137, 138 Mix ...................................................................................... 94 [MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 112 [MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 55 MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80 Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 39 MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 59 MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons .......................................... 19, 64 Multi Pads ............................................................................ 15 Multi Recording ................................................................... 85 Music Stand ......................................................................... 17 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................ 70 N NAME ............................................................................ 38, 41 Naming Files and Folders ..................................................... 38 NEW (Folder) ....................................................................... 41 [NEXT] button .......................................................... 19, 37, 43 Normal................................................................................. 92 Note Events .......................................................................... 96 Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 138 Note Limit .......................................................................... 108 Nrm...................................................................................... 88 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 107 NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 108 O OCTAVE ............................................................................ 114 OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) ............................................. 80 OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) .......................................... 80 Open/Save displays .............................................................. 35 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 41 Oriental Scales ..................................................................... 72 Original Beat ...................................................................... 104 Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 102 Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 69 Other Settings..................................................................... 132 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ......................................... 19, 136 Overdub recording ............................................................... 99 Owner................................................................................ 135 P Pad....................................................................................... 85 PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) ......................................... 82 Parameter ........................................................................... 107 Parameter Lock................................................................... 133 PASTE ............................................................................ 39, 40 Pedal .................................................................................. 123 PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY ........................................................ 123 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT ...................................................... 92 Pedal-controllable Functions .............................................. 124 150 PSR-A1000 [PHONES] jack .............................................................18, 136 Phrase...................................................................................85 Phrase Mark..................................................................69, 121 PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................121 PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 55 PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................114 Pitch settings for each scale ..................................................73 Playback of Songs .................................................................21 Playing a style.................................................................28, 56 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................58 Playing Along with the PSR-A1000 .......................................32 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................................69 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections ...................................................63 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................53 Playing Styles........................................................................28 Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 49 Playing the Internal Songs .....................................................67 Playing the sounds of the PSR-A1000 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder ........................................................136 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26 Playing Voices ......................................................................25 Playing with the Songs ..........................................................32 PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) .....................................80 PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console) ..............................114 Power Supply........................................................................16 Powering Up.........................................................................17 Power-on Procedure .............................................................16 PRESET drive.........................................................................36 Preset MIDI Templates ........................................................129 Punch In/Out ........................................................................92 Pure Major............................................................................73 Pure Minor............................................................................73 Pythagorean..........................................................................73 Q Quantize.......................................................................93, 106 Quantize Size .......................................................................93 Quick Recording...................................................................84 QUICK START ....................................................................121 Quick Start..........................................................................121 R Rast.......................................................................................73 Realtime Recording.............................................................101 Realtime Recording Characteristics .......................................99 [REC] button ...................................................................18, 83 REC END ..............................................................................92 Rec Mode .............................................................................92 REC START ...........................................................................92 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup .................................78 Recalling the Registered Settings ...........................................78 Recalling the Scale Setting ....................................................75 Receive...............................................................................131 Receive Transpose ..............................................................130 Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................131 Recording .............................................................................33 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......90 Recording Individual Notes...................................................87 Recording Melodies ..............................................................89 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs ................83 Registering Panel Setups .......................................................76 REGISTRATION EDIT display ...............................................77 Registration Memory.............................................................76 Index S S.STOP WINDOW ............................................................. 122 SAVE .................................................................................... 41 Save ............................................................................... 35, 41 Saving Files .......................................................................... 41 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 77 Saving Your Scale Settings .................................................... 74 Scale .................................................................................... 73 Scale Memory ...................................................................... 74 [SCALE MEMORY] button .................................................... 75 SCALE MEMORY button....................................................... 74 Scale Setting ......................................................................... 72 [SCALE SETTING] buttons .................................................... 72 SCALE TUNE BANK display ................................................. 75 SCALE TUNE display ............................................................ 72 SCALE TUNE EDIT display ................................................... 75 Scale Tuning ........................................................................ 72 [SCALE TUNING] button...................................................... 72 Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons ........... 61 SECTION SET ..................................................................... 122 sections ................................................................................ 30 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out ............................................................... 92 Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 51 Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 37 Selecting Intro and Ending Types .......................................... 63 Selecting items ..................................................................... 43 Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 78 SEQUENCE END ................................................................ 126 Sequence Format................................................................ 143 sequencer........................................................................... 140 Set Up .................................................................................. 95 Setting an Oriental Scale ...................................................... 34 Setting an Oriental Scale — Scale Setting ............................. 72 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 122 Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 131 Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 127 Setting Root Note Channels ................................................ 131 Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ................................................................ 54 Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 121 Setting the Fingering Method .............................................. 123 Setting the Level Balance and Voice ................................... 113 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 129 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 126 Setting the volume................................................................ 17 SFX....................................................................................... 52 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style .. 68 SINGLE FINGER....................................................................59 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................143 Song ...............................................................................14, 66 SONG [START / STOP] button ........................................18, 67 SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................113 SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................121 Song Creator .........................................................................83 Song Playback ..........................................................21, 66, 67 Song Recording.....................................................................83 Song Settings.......................................................................121 SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................81 Sound Creator Parameters.....................................................80 [SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 79 Source Root/Chord..............................................................107 SOURCE1 .............................................................................94 SOURCE2 .............................................................................94 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets .............................................................................126 SPEED...................................................................................82 SPEED (HARMONY) .............................................................82 Split Point ...........................................................................122 [STANDBY/ON] switch.............................................14, 18, 17 Step Record ..........................................................................87 Step Record (Chord)..............................................................90 Step Record (Note)................................................................89 Step Recording....................................................................102 STOP ACMP .......................................................................122 [STOP] button (MULTI PAD)...........................................19, 64 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................62 Strength ..............................................................................105 Style................................................................................14, 56 STYLE [START / STOP] button.........................................18, 57 STYLE buttons .................................................................18, 56 Style Creator .........................................................................99 Style File .......................................................................17, 143 Style File Format .................................................................100 Style Sections........................................................................30 Style Setting ........................................................................122 sustain ............................................................................81, 82 [SUSUTAIN] button ........................................................19, 54 Sweet!...................................................................................52 Swing..................................................................................104 [SYNC.START] button .....................................................18, 57 [SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 62 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ....................................................97 System ................................................................................129 System and Insertion ...........................................................117 System Events .......................................................................97 System Messages.................................................................142 System Reset .......................................................................135 SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................135 T Tap Count...........................................................................133 [TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................19, 48 TEMPO [E] [ ] buttons..............................................19, 47 Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................48 [TO HOST] terminal ...............................................15, 19, 138 TO HOST terminal..............................................................138 [TOP] button...................................................................18, 69 TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................82 TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator)............................................80 [TOUCH] button.............................................................19, 54 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 70 [TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 70 Transmit..............................................................................130 Transmit Clock....................................................................130 E REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 76 REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 76 Registration Sequence ........................................................ 126 RELEASE ............................................................................... 81 Remove Event .................................................................... 106 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 70 [REPEAT] button ............................................................. 18, 70 Resonance............................................................................ 81 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-A1000............................................................ 135 Reverb................................................................................ 117 REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator) .......................................... 82 [REW] button ................................................................. 18, 69 Rhythm ................................................................................ 85 Root ................................................................................... 131 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 108 PSR-A1000 151 Index Transmitting MIDI Data ...................................................... 130 TRANSPOSE [E] [ ] buttons.................................... 19, 125 Transpose Assign ................................................................ 125 Tune................................................................................... 114 TUNING ............................................................................ 114 Tuning the Overall Pitch .................................................... 120 TYPE (HARMONY) ............................................................... 82 E U [UPPER OCTAVE] button ............................................... 19, 55 USER drive ........................................................................... 36 USER EFFECT (Function)..................................................... 135 User Effect (Mixing Console) .............................................. 116 Using Oriental Scales – Scale Setting/Scale Tuning/ Scale Memory ................................................................... 72 Using the USB terminal on your computer with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256, etc.)......................... 139 Using Your PSR-A1000 with Other Devices ....................... 136 Utility ................................................................................. 132 V [VARIATION] button ...................................................... 19, 55 Velocity........................................................................ 88, 105 Velocity Change ................................................................. 106 VIBRATO ............................................................................. 82 VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator) ........................................ 81 VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator)........................................ 81 VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) ......................................... 81 Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 143 VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 51 Voice Characteristics ............................................................ 52 Voice Effects......................................................................... 54 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 19, 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 19, 53 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button .......................... 19, 53 Voice Set ............................................................................ 127 VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................ 82 VOLUME (Sound Creator) .................................................... 80 Volume/Voice .................................................................... 113 W Werckmeister ....................................................................... 73 What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 142 What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 139 X XF ................................................................................ 17, 143 XG ............................................................................... 17, 143 152 PSR-A1000 MEMO PSR-A1000 153 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) 154 PSR-A1000 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. ASIA ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND EUROPE HONG KONG F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 THAILAND OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [PK] 22 (PSR-A1000) PSR-A1000 155 Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation Printed in Indonesia ??????? ???AP???.?-01A0-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Sintetizador
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Manuel utilisateur
- italiano: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Manuale utente
- English: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 User manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Benutzerhandbuch
- русский: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Руководство пользователя
- Nederlands: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Handleiding
- português: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Brugermanual
- polski: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Kullanım kılavuzu
- suomi: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Ohjekirja
- română: Yamaha Portatone PSR A1000 Manual de utilizare
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha PSR-OR700 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha PSR-A5000 Manual de usuario
-
-
-
-
Yamaha PSR-SX700 Digital Workstation Manual de usuario